Перевод: со всех языков на английский

с английского на все языки

one's+hour+of+glory

  • 1 gloire

    gloire [glwaʀ]
    feminine noun
       a. ( = renommée) fame ; [de vedette] stardom
    • s'attribuer toute la gloire de qch to give o.s. all the credit for sth
       c. ( = louange) praise
    • poème à la gloire de qn/qch poem in praise of sb/sth
    • célébrer or chanter la gloire de qn/qch to sing the praises of sb/sth
       d. (personne = célébrité) celebrity
    * * *
    glwaʀ
    1) ( renom) glory, fame
    2) ( hommage)

    rendre gloire à quelqu'un/au courage de quelqu'un — to pay tribute to somebody/to somebody's courage

    4) ( personne) celebrity; ( dans le monde du spectacle) star
    5) ( splendeur) glory
    * * *
    ɡlwaʀ nf
    1) (= grand renom acquis par des actes remarquables) glory

    se couvrir de gloire — to cover o.s. with glory

    l'amour, la gloire, l'argent — love, fame, money

    2) (= personne) celebrity
    * * *
    gloire nf
    1 ( renom) glory, fame; la gloire militaire military glory; la gloire littéraire literary fame; la gloire et la fortune fame and fortune; se couvrir de gloire to cover oneself with glory; chercher la gloire to seek fame; c'est ce qui a fait leur gloire that's what made them famous; avoir or connaître son heure de gloire to have one's hour of glory;
    2 ( mérite) credit; s'attribuer la gloire de qch to take the credit for sth; faire qch pour la gloire to do sth (just) for the sake of it;
    3 ( hommage) glory, praise; gloire à Dieu! glory be to God, praise the Lord!; monument à la gloire de qn monument to the glory of sb; rendre gloire à qn/au courage de qn to pay tribute to sb/to sb's courage, to praise sb/sb's courage;
    4 ( sujet de fierté) tirer gloire de qch/de faire qch to pride oneself on sth/on doing sth;
    5 ( personne) celebrity; ( dans le monde du spectacle) star; les gloires locales hum the local worthies○;
    6 ( splendeur) glory; la gloire de la Grèce the glory of Greece; dans toute leur gloire in all their glory;
    7 Art ( auréole) le Christ en gloire Christ in majesty.
    [glwar] nom féminin
    1. [renom] fame
    au faîte ou sommet de sa gloire at the height ou pinnacle of his fame
    ne t'attends pas à être payé, on fait ça pour la gloire don't expect payment, we're doing it for love
    2. [mérite] glory, credit
    3. [éloge] praise
    écrit à la gloire de... written in praise of...
    gloire à Dieu praise be to ou glory to God
    4. [personne] celebrity
    5. ART [auréole] aureole
    [ciel décoré] glory

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > gloire

  • 2 heure

    heure [œʀ]
    feminine noun
       a. ( = 60 minutes) hour
    • gagner 30 € de l'heure to earn 30 euros an hour
    • savez-vous l'heure ? do you know the time?
    • quelle heure est-il ? what time is it?
    • quelle heure as-tu ? what time do you make it?
    • avez-vous l'heure ? have you got the time?
    • tu as vu l'heure ? do you realize what time it is?
    • à 16 heures 30 at 4.30 pm
    • demain, à la première heure first thing in the morning
       c. ( = moment) time
    • c'est l'heure ! (de rendre un devoir) time's up!
    • c'est l'heure d'aller au lit ! it's time for bed!
    • il est midi, heure locale it's noon, local time
    • ce doit être Paul, c'est son heure it must be Paul, it's his usual time
       d. (locutions)
    • à l'heure qu'il est, il devrait être rentré he should be home by now► à toute heure at any time
    * * *
    œʀ
    1) ( soixante minutes) hour

    24 heures sur 24 — lit, fig 24 hours a day

    d'heure en heure — [augmenter, empirer] by the hour

    2) ( indication) time

    à 11 heures, heure de Paris — at 11, Paris time

    à 4 heures pile or tapantes — (colloq) at 4 o'clock sharp

    ‘sandwiches à toute heure’ — ‘sandwiches available at any time’

    de bonne heure — [se lever, partir] early

    c'est son heure — it's his/her usual time

    de la première heure — [résistant, militant] from the very beginning

    de dernière heure — [manœuvre, décision] last-minute

    4) (période, époque) time

    à l'heure actuelle, pour l'heure — at the present time

    l'heure du déjeuner/thé/d îner — lunchtime/teatime/dinnertime

    5) ( ère) era
    •
    Phrasal Verbs:
    ••

    avant l'heure, c'est pas l'heure, après l'heure, c'est plus l'heure — (colloq) there's no time but the right time

    vivre à cent à l'heure — (colloq) fig to be always on the go (colloq)

    * * *
    œʀ nf
    1) (durée) hour

    Le trajet dure six heures. — The journey lasts six hours.

    24 heures sur 24 — round the clock, 24 hours a day

    100 km à l'heure — 60 miles an hour, 60 miles per hour

    2) (moment) time

    pourriez-vous me donner l'heure, s'il vous plaît? — could you tell me the time, please?

    C'est l'heure de la sieste. — It's siesta time.

    être à l'heure [personne] — to be on time, [montre] to be right

    à l'heure qu'il est (= actuellement) — now

    La situation évolue d'heure en heure. — The situation is developing from one hour to the next.

    3) ÉDUCATION period
    * * *
    1 ( soixante minutes) hour; une heure avant or plus tôt an hour before; deux heures après or plus tard two hours later; en une heure in an hour; 24 heures sur 24 lit, fig twenty four hours a day, round the clock; dans l'heure qui a suivi within the hour; dans les 24 heures within 24 hours; d'heure en heure [augmenter, empirer] by the hour; suivre qch heure par heure to follow sth hour by hour; deux heures de repos/d'attente a two-hour rest/wait; toutes les deux heures every two hours; il y a un train toutes les heures there's a train every hour; après trois heures d'avion after three hours on the plane, after a three-hour flight; être à trois heures de train/d'avion de Paris to be three hours away from Paris by train/plane; être à trois heures de marche de Paris to be a three-hour walk from Paris; faire trois heures de bateau/d'avion to be on the boat/plane for three hours; faire du 60 à l'heure○, faire 60 km à l'heure to do 60 km per hour; être payé à l'heure to be paid by the hour; gagner 40 euros de l'heure to earn 40 euros an hour; la semaine de 35 heures the 35-hour week; avoir deux heures de chimie par semaine to have two hours of chemistry per week; une petite heure an hour at the most; une bonne heure a good hour; ça fait une heure que je t'attends! ( par exagération) I've been waiting for an hour!; nous avons parlé du projet pendant des heures we talked about the project for hours on end;
    2 ( indication) time; l'heure exacte or juste the exact ou right time; quelle heure est-il? what time is it, what's the time?; tu as l'heure? have you got the time? ; à quelle heure…? (at) what time…?; à 11 heures, heure de Paris at 11, Paris time; il ne sait pas lire l'heure he can't tell the time; se tromper d'heure to get the time wrong; il est 10 heures it's 10 (o'clock); il est 10 heures 20 it's 20 past 10; il est 10 heures moins 20 it's 20 to 10; à 5 heures du matin/de l'après-midi at 5 in the morning/in the afternoon, at 5 am/pm; à 4 heures pile or tapantes○ at 4 o'clock sharp ou on the dot; mettre/remettre sa montre à l'heure to set/reset one's watch; l'heure tourne time is passing;
    3 ( point dans le temps) time; l'heure d'un rendez-vous/de la prière the time of an appointment/for prayer; il est or c'est l'heure de faire it's time to do; c'est l'heure, il faut que j'y aille it's time, I must go; l'heure d'arrivée/de départ the arrival/departure time; heures d'ouverture/de fermeture opening/closing times; arriver/être à l'heure to arrive/be on time; à l'heure convenue at the agreed time; ‘sandwiches à toute heure’ ‘sandwiches available at any time’; à une heure indue at an unearthly hour; à une heure avancée (de la nuit) late at night; de bonne heure [se lever, partir] early; il doit être loin à l'heure qu'il est he must be a long way off by now; c'est son heure it's his/her usual time; il ne viendra pas à l'heure qu'il est he won't come this late; mourir avant l'heure to die before one's time; ton heure viendra your time will come; son heure est venue his/her time has come; à l'heure où je te parle while I'm speaking to you, at this very moment; de la première heure [résistant, militant] from the very beginning; à la première heure at first light; de dernière heure [manœuvre, décision] last-minute; un résistant de la dernière heure a late convert to the resistance; ta dernière heure est arrivée your time has come;
    4 (période, époque) time; à l'heure actuelle, pour l'heure at the present time; à l'heure où… at a time when…; à l'heure de la restructuration/détente at a time of restructuring/détente; à l'heure de la pause during the break; l'heure du déjeuner/thé/dîner lunchtime/teatime/dinnertime; aux heures des repas at mealtimes; pendant les heures de bureau/de classe during office/school hours; l'heure est à l'entreprise individuelle the current trend is for private enterprise; l'heure n'est pas à la polémique/l'optimisme this is no time for controversy/optimism; l'heure est grave the situation is serious; il est peintre/poète à ses heures he paints/writes poetry in his spare time; c'est la bonne/la mauvaise heure it's the right/a bad time; à la bonne heure! well done!;
    5 ( ère) era; vivre à l'heure des satellites/de l'audiovisuel to live in the satellite/audiovisual era.
    heure d'affluence Transp peak hour; aux heures d'affluence during peak hours; heure d'été Admin summer time GB, daylight saving(s) time US; heure H Mil, fig zero hour; heure d'hiver Admin winter time GB, daylight saving(s) time US; heure légale Admin standard time; heure locale Admin local time; heure de pointe Transp rush hour; aux heures de pointe during (the) rush hour; heures canoniales Relig canonical hours; heures supplémentaires, heures sup○ Entr overtime; faire des heures supplémentaires to do ou work overtime; ⇒ quatorze.
    avant l'heure, c'est pas l'heure, après l'heure, c'est plus l'heure○ there's no time but the right time; vivre à cent à l'heure○ fig to be always on the go○.
    [ɶr] nom féminin
    1. [unité de temps] hour
    24 heures sur 24 round-the-clock, 24 hours a day
    2. [durée d'un trajet] hour
    il y a trois heures de marche/vol it's a three hour walk/flight
    3. [unité de travail ou de salaire] hour
    une heure de travail an hour's work, an hour of work
    une heure supplémentaire an ou one hour's overtime
    4. [point précis de la journée] time
    15 h heure locale 3 p.m. local time
    a. [de partir] it's time (to go)!
    b. [de rendre sa copie] time's up!
    l'heure, c'est l'heure on time is on time
    quand c'est l'heure, c'est l'heure! (familier) when you've got to go, you've got to go!
    avant l'heure, c'est pas l'heure, après l'heure c'est plus l'heure there's a right time for every thing
    quelle heure est-il? what time is it?, what's the time?
    il y a une heure pour tout, chaque chose à son heure there's a time (and a place) for everything
    il n'y a pas d'heure pour les braves! when a man's got to go, a man's got to go!
    il n'a pas d' heure, avec lui il n'y a pas d'heure (familier) [il n'est pas ponctuel] he just turns up when it suits him
    l'heure d'été British Summer Time (UK), daylight (saving) time (US)
    passer à l'heure d'été/d'hiver to put the clocks forward/back
    l'heure de Greenwich Greenwich Mean Time, GMT
    5. [moment] time
    à une heure indue at some ungodly ou godforsaken hour
    ce doit être ma tante qui appelle, c'est son heure that must be my aunt, this is her usual time for calling
    a. [sans foule] off-peak period
    b. [sans clients] slack period
    6. [période d'une vie] hour
    dis-toi que ce n'était pas ton heure don't worry, your time will come
    ————————
    heures nom féminin pluriel
    à la bonne heure locution adverbiale
    elle est reçue, à la bonne heure! so she passed, good ou marvellous!
    à l'heure locution adjectivale
    1. [personne] on time
    2. [montre]
    à l'heure locution adverbiale
    mettre sa montre/une pendule à l'heure to set one's watch/a clock right
    à l'heure de locution prépositionnelle
    in the era ou age of
    de bonne heure locution adverbiale
    [tôt] early
    [en avance] in good time
    pour l'heure locution adverbiale
    for now ou the time being ou the moment
    sur l'heure locution adverbiale
    tout à l'heure locution adverbiale
    1. [dans un moment] later, in a (short ou little) while
    2. [il y a un moment] earlier (today)

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > heure

  • 3 час

    муж.
    1) hour (отрезок времени)

    час пробил, настал — one's hour/time has come

    - полтора часа
    - с час
    - с часу на час
    - целый час
    - час от часу
    - через час
    - четверть часа

    в три часа утра — at three (o'clock)in the morning; at 3 a. m.

    в шесть часов вечера — at six (o'clock) in the afternoon; at 6 p. m.

    час дня — one (o'clock) in the afternoon; 1 p. m.

    час ночи — one (o'clock) in the morning; 1 a. m.

    3) time; hours; period (время, посвященное чему-л.)

    присутственные часы — office/business hours

    час отдыха — rest-time, time of rest

    час рисования — drawing period (в школе и т.д.)

    часы пик — rush-hours, peak hours

    часы работы — business hours, ( учреждений) office hours

    ••

    академический час — teaching/school period

    мертвый час — rest time/hour, after-dinner rest

    битый час — for a solid hour, for a good hour

    в свой час — at the proper/right moment, at the proper time

    звездный час — finest/shining hour, moment of glory

    не в добрый час — in an evil hour, at an unlucky moment

    расти не по дням, а по часам — to grow before one's eyes

    смертный час — the time of one's death, one's last hours

    Русско-английский словарь по общей лексике > час

  • 4 connaître

    connaître° [kɔnεtʀ]
    ➭ TABLE 57
    1. transitive verb
       a. to know
    • connais-tu un bon restaurant ? do you know of a good restaurant?
    • connaître qn de vue/nom/réputation to know sb by sight/name/reputation
    • il l'a connu à l'université he met or knew him at university
    • vous connaissez la dernière (nouvelle) ? have you heard the latest (news)?
       b. [+ langue, science, auteur] to know
    • connaître les oiseaux/les plantes to know about birds/plants
       c. ( = éprouver) [+ faim, privations] to know ; [+ humiliations] to experience
       d. ( = avoir) [+ succès] to enjoy
       e. faire connaître [+ idée, sentiment] to make known ; [+ décision] to announce
    • se faire connaître (par le succès) to make a name for o.s. ; (aller voir qn) to introduce o.s.
    2. reflexive verb
       a.
       b. ( = se rencontrer) to meet
    • quand il s'agit d'embêter les autres, il s'y connaît ! (inf) when it comes to annoying people he's an expert! (inf)
    * * *
    kɔnɛtʀ
    1.
    1) to know [fait, nom, événement]

    il ne tient jamais ses promesses, c'est (bien) connu — it is common knowledge that he never keeps his promises

    2) to know, to be acquainted with [sujet, méthode, auteur]

    la mécanique, je ne connais que ça or ça me connaît! — I know quite a bit about mechanics

    3) to know [faim]; to experience [crise]; to enjoy [gloire]; to have [difficultés]

    les problèmes d'argent, ça me connaît! — (colloq) I could tell you a thing or two (colloq) about money problems!

    connaître des hauts et des bas — to have one's/its ups and downs

    4) to know [personne, acteur]

    c'est bien mal la connaître — they/you're misjudging her

    5) (dated) ( coucher avec) to know (dated), to have a sexual relationship with

    avoir à connaître de — to judge ou hear [cas]


    2.
    se connaître verbe pronominal
    1) ( soi-même) to know oneself

    ‘connais-toi toi-même’ — ‘know thyself’

    il ne se connaissait plus de joie — fml he was beside himself with joy

    2) ( l'un l'autre) to know each other

    c'est le carburateur qui est bouché ou je ne m'y connais pas — (colloq) if I know anything about it, it's the carburettor GB ou carburetor US that's blocked

    ••

    on connaît la chanson or musique! — we've heard it all before!

    * * *
    kɔnɛtʀ vt
    1) [technique, matière] to know
    2) [ville, personne] to know

    Je ne connais pas du tout cette région. — I don't know this area at all.

    Je le connais de vue. — I know him by sight.

    se faire connaître en faisant qch; Le groupe s'est fait connaître en gagnant le concours Eurovision. — the group found fame when it won the Eurovision song contest.

    3) [personne] (= éprouver) [sensation, sentiment] to experience, (= faire l'expérience de) [difficultés, misère, guerre] to experience

    Il a fini dans la misère après avoir connu le faste et la gloire. — He ended up destitute, after having known fame and riches.

    4) [film, chanson, économie, secteur] (= avoir, rencontrer) to have, to enjoy

    L'industrie du tourisme connaît une période exceptionnelle. — The tourist industry is having a very good period.

    Ce film connaît actuellement un grand succès. — This film is currently enjoying a huge success.

    * * *
    connaître verb table: connaître
    A vtr
    1 ( avoir connaissance de) to know [fait, nom, événement, résultat]; ne pas connaître sa force not to know one's own strength; vous connaissez la suite you know the rest; je connais les raisons de ta colère I know why you're angry; il nous a fait connaître son avis/ses intentions he made his opinion/his intentions known (to us); tu connais l'histoire de Toto qui… do you know the one about Toto who…; il ne tient jamais ses promesses, c'est (bien) connu it is common knowledge that he never keeps his promises; tes promesses, on connaît! we know all about your promises!; la rue de la Glacière? connais pas○! rue de la Glacière? never heard of it!; je lui connais de grands talents I know that he/she is very talented; je ne leur connais aucun vice I don't know them to have any vices; on te connaît plusieurs amants we know you to have several lovers; ne connaître ni le pourquoi ni le comment de qch not to know the whys and the wherefores of sth; leur vie privée est connue de tous everybody knows about their private life; tu connais la nouvelle? have you heard the news?; tu ne connais pas ta chance you don't know how lucky you are; j'en connais long sur ton passé I know a lot about your past; ne connaître que son plaisir/devoir to think of nothing but one's pleasure/duty; ⇒ Dieu, loup;
    2 ( pour avoir étudié) to know, to be acquainted with [sujet, méthode, auteur]; la mécanique, je ne connais que ça or ça me connaît! I know quite a bit about mechanics; elle connaît tout du solfège she knows all about music theory; c'est lui qui m'a fait connaître la musique cajun it was he who introduced me to Cajun music; connaître un poème/une partition musicale par cœur to know a poem/a score (off) by heart; en connaître un rayon○ en histoire/théâtre to know one's stuff○ when it comes to history/the theatreGB;
    3 ( faire l'expérience de) to know, to experience [faim, froid, pauvreté, amour]; to experience [crise, défaite, échec]; to enjoy [gloire, succès]; to have [difficultés, problèmes]; il connaît l'humiliation de la défaite he knows ou has experienced the humiliation of defeat; ils ont connu la défaite they were defeated; il a connu la prison he's been to prison before; il ne connaît pas la pitié/la honte he knows no pity/shame; c'est un homme qui connaît la vie he's a man who knows what life is about; connaître les femmes/hommes to know something about women/men; il a connu son heure de gloire he has had his hour of glory; les problèmes d'argent, ça me connaît○! I could tell you a thing or two○ about money problems!; connaître des hauts et des bas to have one's/its ups and downs; connaître une fin tragique to come to a tragic end; connaître une situation difficile to be in a difficult situation; connaître une forte croissance to show a rapid growth; le club sportif connaît un nouvel essor the sports club is having a new lease of GB ou on US life; ils auraient pu connaître un meilleur sort they could have had a better fate;
    4 ( de réputation) to know [personne, acteur]; elle est très connue she's (very) well-known; connaître qn de nom/vue to know sb by name/sight; je le connais de réputation mais je ne l'ai jamais rencontré I know ou I've heard of him but I've never met him; une œuvre connue/peu connue a well-known/little-known work (de by); être d'abord connu comme violoniste to be chiefly known as a violinist;
    5 ( personnellement) to know [ami, parent, relation]; je le connais depuis longtemps I've known him for a long time; vous ne me connaissez pas you don't know me; j'ai appris à connaître mon père en grandissant I got to know my father as I grew up; j'aimerais bien la connaître I'd really like to get to know her; c'est bien mal la connaître que de croire que… they/you're misjudging her if they/you think that…; je le connais trop bien I know him only too well; faire connaître qn à qn to introduce sb to sb; mes parents? je les connais, ils seront ravis! my parents? if I know them, they'll be delighted; Bernadette? je ne connais qu'elle! Bernadette? I know her very well!; il ne me connaît plus depuis qu'il est passé officier he ignores me now that he's an officer;
    6 †( coucher avec) to know†, to have a sexual relationship with;
    7 Jur connaître de to have jurisdiction over [affaire, cause]; avoir à connaître de to judge ou hear [cas].
    1 ( soi-même) to know oneself; il se connaît mal he doesn't know himself very well; ‘connais-toi toi-même’ ‘know thyself’; il ne se connaissait plus de joie fml he was beside himself with joy; quand il a bu, il ne se connaît plus when he's drunk, he goes berserk;
    2 ( l'un l'autre) to know each other; nous nous sommes connus chez des amis communs we met (each other) at the home of some mutual friends;
    3 ( être compétent) s'y connaître en électricité/théâtre to know all about electricity/theatre; c'est le carburateur qui est bouché ou je ne m'y connais pas if I know anything about it, it's the carburettor GB ou carburetor US that's blocked.
    on connaît la chanson or musique! we've heard it all before!, it's the same old story!; c'est un air connu it's the same old story; connaître qch comme sa poche to know sth like the back of one's hand, to know sth inside out.
    [kɔnɛtr] verbe transitif
    A.[AVOIR UNE IDÉE DE]
    1. [avoir mémorisé - code postal, itinéraire, mot de passe] to know
    2. [être informé de - information, nouvelle] to know
    a. [avis, sentiment] to make known
    b. [décision, jugement] to make known, to announce
    3. [avoir des connaissances sur - langue, ville, appareil, œuvre] to know, to be familiar with ; [ - technique] to know, to be acquainted with ; [ - sujet] to know (about)
    je connais un peu l'informatique I have some basic knowledge of computing, I know a little about computing
    ça me/le connaît (familier) : les bons vins, ça le connaît! he knows a thing or two about ou he's an expert on good wine!
    B.[IDENTIFIER, ÊTRE EN RELATION AVEC]
    1. [par l'identité] to know
    connaître quelqu'un de vue/nom/réputation to know somebody by sight/name/reputation
    a. [révéler son identité] to make oneself known
    b. [devenir une personne publique] to make oneself ou to become known
    la connaissant, ça ne me surprend pas knowing her, I'm not surprised
    si tu fais ça, je ne te connais plus! if you do that, I'll have nothing more to do with you!
    2. [rencontrer] to meet
    ah, si je t'avais connue plus tôt! if only I'd met you earlier!
    C.[ÉPROUVER]
    1. [peur, amour] to feel, to know, to experience
    2. [faire l'expérience de] to experience
    ah, l'insouciance de la jeunesse, j'ai connu ça! I was young and carefree once!
    [obtenir - succès, gloire] to have, to experience
    enfin, elle connut la consécration she finally received the highest accolade
    3. [subir - crise] to go ou to live through (inseparable), to experience ; [ - épreuve, humiliation, guerre] to live through (inseparable), to suffer, to undergo
    il a connu bien des déboires he has had ou suffered plenty of setbacks
    D.[ADMETTRE]
    1. [suj: chose] to have
    2. [suj: personne]
    contre les rhumes, je ne connais qu'un bon grog there's nothing like a hot toddy to cure a cold
    ————————
    je n'oserai jamais, je me connais I'd never dare, I know what I'm like
    ————————
    ————————
    se connaître verbe pronominal intransitif
    ah ça, pour râler, il s'y connaît! (familier) he's very good at grumbling!
    pour les gaffes, tu t'y connais! (familier) when it comes to blunders, you take some beating!
    c'est un escroc, ou je ne m'y connais pas! I know a crook when I see one!

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > connaître

  • 5 Ч-11

    ЗВЁЗДНЫЙ ЧАС (чей, кого) lit, occas. iron NP sing only fixed WO
    the moment or period (in s.o. 's life, some field etc) when the greatest success or triumph is achieved, the greatest accomplishments are made etc
    shining (finest, brightest) hour
    s.o. fc (one's) moment of glory.
    Никто, как я понял, не желает колоться (slang = признаваться) и брать дело на себя. Молчат, как вполне нормальные люди с развитым инстинктом самосохранения. Наконец кто-то, почуявший свой звёздный час, сказал: «Разрешите доложить?» (Алешковский 1). Nobody wanted to open his mouth and take the rap. They all keep their traps shut, like any normal guy with a well-developed instinct for self-preservation. Finally someone who felt his moment of glory had come said, "Permission to report" (1a).

    Большой русско-английский фразеологический словарь > Ч-11

  • 6 звездный час

    • ЗВЕЗДНЫЙ ЧАС ( чей, кого) lit, occas. iron
    [NP; sing only; fixed WO]
    =====
    ⇒ the moment or period (in s.o.'s life, some field etc) when the greatest success or triumph is achieved, the greatest accomplishments are made etc:
    - shining (finest, brightest) hour;
    - s.o.'s (one's) moment of glory.
         ♦ Никто, как я понял, не желает колоться [slang = признаваться] и брать дело на себя. Молчат, как вполне нормальные люди с развитым инстинктом самосохранения. Наконец кто-то, почуявший свой звёздный час, сказал: "Разрешите доложить?" (Алешковский 1). Nobody wanted to open his mouth and take the rap. They all keep their traps shut, like any normal guy with a well-developed instinct for self-preservation. Finally someone who felt his moment of glory had come said, "Permission to report" (1a).

    Большой русско-английский фразеологический словарь > звездный час

  • 7 lejano

    adj.
    1 distant, far, far away, remote.
    2 distant, far.
    * * *
    1 (tierra, país) distant, far-off, far-away; (pariente, familia) distant
    * * *
    (f. - lejana)
    adj.
    distant, far, remote
    * * *
    ADJ
    1) [en el espacio, en el tiempo] distant
    2) [pariente] distant
    * * *
    - na adjetivo
    a) < época> distant, far-off;; < lugar> remote, far-off

    en un lejano país — in a distant o far-away country (liter)

    b) < pariente> distant
    * * *
    = far-flung, outlying, remote, far [farther/further -comp., farthest/furthest -sup.], distant, far away, from afar, far off, distanced.
    Ex. Books by authors of all origins, African, Chinese, Hindu, Muslim, have now become commonplace in even the most far-flung libraries of Europe and America.
    Ex. Attempts were made to reach beyond the larger cities through the use of mobile vans to visit outlying towns and rural areas.
    Ex. The computer, once instructed on the desired filing order, is eminently suitable for filing, achieving a level of consistency which was a remote dream in the days of human filers.
    Ex. A public libary's site communicates at two levels: as a site for the building and as a qualification of the site as far/near, accessible/inaccessible, inviting/uninviting, etc.
    Ex. She had a distant fleeting vision of a workplace in which people acted like free and sensible human beings, instead of like the martyrized and victimized puppets of a terrible system called 'one-upmanship'.
    Ex. She saw everything as if it were happening in a small room far away, or as if she were looking at it through the wrong end of a telescope.
    Ex. Experts from afar can be drawn into virtual classrooms to stimulate deeper learning from extended interaction.
    Ex. Resolution of copyright issues seems still far off.
    Ex. The author explores issues relating to the development of self service skills and competencies by distanced users.
    ----
    * de tierras lejanas = from distant shores.
    * emplazado en un lugar lejano = outstation.
    * en el futuro lejano = further in the future.
    * en un futuro más o menos lejano = in the near future.
    * en un futuro no muy lejano = in the not too distant future, in the near future.
    * en un pasado muy lejano = in the dim and distant past.
    * en un pasado no muy lejano = in the not too distant past.
    * en un pasado oscuro y lejano = in the dim and distant past.
    * en un período más o menos lejano = in the near future.
    * estar muy lejano = be far off.
    * Lejano Oeste, el = Wild West, the.
    * Lejano Oriente, el = Far East, the.
    * muy lejano = far off.
    * pasado lejano, el = distant past, the.
    * situado en un lugar lejano = outstation.
    * tan lejano como = as far afield as.
    * * *
    - na adjetivo
    a) < época> distant, far-off;; < lugar> remote, far-off

    en un lejano país — in a distant o far-away country (liter)

    b) < pariente> distant
    * * *
    = far-flung, outlying, remote, far [farther/further -comp., farthest/furthest -sup.], distant, far away, from afar, far off, distanced.

    Ex: Books by authors of all origins, African, Chinese, Hindu, Muslim, have now become commonplace in even the most far-flung libraries of Europe and America.

    Ex: Attempts were made to reach beyond the larger cities through the use of mobile vans to visit outlying towns and rural areas.
    Ex: The computer, once instructed on the desired filing order, is eminently suitable for filing, achieving a level of consistency which was a remote dream in the days of human filers.
    Ex: A public libary's site communicates at two levels: as a site for the building and as a qualification of the site as far/near, accessible/inaccessible, inviting/uninviting, etc.
    Ex: She had a distant fleeting vision of a workplace in which people acted like free and sensible human beings, instead of like the martyrized and victimized puppets of a terrible system called 'one-upmanship'.
    Ex: She saw everything as if it were happening in a small room far away, or as if she were looking at it through the wrong end of a telescope.
    Ex: Experts from afar can be drawn into virtual classrooms to stimulate deeper learning from extended interaction.
    Ex: Resolution of copyright issues seems still far off.
    Ex: The author explores issues relating to the development of self service skills and competencies by distanced users.
    * de tierras lejanas = from distant shores.
    * emplazado en un lugar lejano = outstation.
    * en el futuro lejano = further in the future.
    * en un futuro más o menos lejano = in the near future.
    * en un futuro no muy lejano = in the not too distant future, in the near future.
    * en un pasado muy lejano = in the dim and distant past.
    * en un pasado no muy lejano = in the not too distant past.
    * en un pasado oscuro y lejano = in the dim and distant past.
    * en un período más o menos lejano = in the near future.
    * estar muy lejano = be far off.
    * Lejano Oeste, el = Wild West, the.
    * Lejano Oriente, el = Far East, the.
    * muy lejano = far off.
    * pasado lejano, el = distant past, the.
    * situado en un lugar lejano = outstation.
    * tan lejano como = as far afield as.

    * * *
    lejano -na
    1 ‹lugar/época› far-off
    en un lejano país vivía un rey in a distant o far-away o far-off country there lived a king ( liter)
    un pueblo lejano a remote village
    en épocas lejanas in the distant past, in far-off times, long ago
    cada vez se sentían más lejanos el uno del otro they felt increasingly distant from each other, they felt they were growing further and further apart
    2 ‹pariente› distant
    hay un lejano parentesco entre ellos they are distantly related
    Compuestos:
    masculine Far West
    masculine Far East
    * * *

    lejano
    ◊ -na adjetivo

    a) ‹época/futuro› distant;

    ‹ lugar› remote, far-off;

    b) ‹ pariente› distant

    lejano,-a adjetivo distant, far-off
    el Lejano Oeste, the Far West
    primos lejanos, distant cousins
    ' lejano' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    extrema
    - extremo
    - lejana
    - parentesco
    - regresar
    - rincón
    - diablo
    - escondido
    - oriental
    - pariente
    English:
    distant
    - far
    - faraway
    - furthermost
    - furthest
    - move away
    - remote
    - remotely
    - slight
    - Wild West
    - saloon
    - wild
    * * *
    lejano, -a adj
    1. [en el espacio] distant;
    un país lejano a distant land o country
    el Lejano Oeste the Far West;
    el Lejano Oriente the Far East
    2. [en el tiempo]
    su boda queda ya muy lejana her wedding was a long time ago;
    no está lejano el día de su triunfo her hour of glory is not far off
    3. [familiar] distant
    * * *
    adj distant
    * * *
    lejano, -na adj
    : remote, distant, far away
    * * *
    lejano adj distant

    Spanish-English dictionary > lejano

  • 8 cuarto

    adj.
    fourth.
    adv.
    fourth, fourthly, in the fourth place.
    m.
    1 room, apartment, chamber, quarter.
    2 fourth, fourth part.
    3 apartment.
    pres.indicat.
    1st person singular (yo) present indicative of spanish verb: cuartar.
    * * *
    ► adjetivo (In 1 and 2, see also sexto,-a)
    1 (ordinal) fourth
    ■ llegó cuarto he arrived in fourth place, he came fourth
    ► nombre masculino,nombre femenino
    1 fourth
    ————————
    1 (parte) quarter
    2 (de animal) quarter
    3 (de ropa) quarter
    1 familiar (dinero) money sing, dough sing
    \
    de tres al cuarto familiar worthless, third-rate
    tres cuartos de lo mismo familiar almost exactly the same
    cuarto creciente first quarter
    cuarto de baño bathroom
    cuarto de estar living room
    cuarto menguante last quarter
    cuarto trasero (carne) hindquarter
    cuarto trastero junk room
    cuartos de final DEPORTE quarter finals
    cuatro cuartos familiar very little money sing
    * * *
    1. (f. - cuarta)
    noun adj.
    2. noun m.
    1) room
    2) quarter, fourth
    * * *
    1.
    ADJ [ordinal] fourth
    sexto 1.
    2. SM
    1) (=habitación) room; (=dormitorio) bedroom, room

    cuarto de aseo — toilet, cloakroom, bathroom (EEUU)

    cuarto de estar — living room, sitting room

    cuarto frío — (Culin) cold store

    cuarto oscuro — (Fot) darkroom; (=trastero) broom cupboard; Arg, Uru voting booth

    2) (=cuarta parte) quarter

    tres cuartos de lo mismo —

    su amigo es un inútil, y él... tres cuartos de lo mismo — his friend is useless, and he's not much better

    en otros países ocurre tres cuartos de lo mismo — it's the same story o it's more of the same in other countries

    3) [en la hora] quarter

    son las seis menos cuarto, es un cuarto para las seis — LAm it's a quarter to six

    tuvo su cuarto de hora, ahora nadie lo lleva — it had its day o it was all the rage, now nobody wears it anymore

    tardó tres cuartos de hora — it took him o he took three quarters of an hour

    4) [de animal] [de cerdo, vaca] joint

    un cuarto de pollo — a chicken quarter, a quarter chicken

    pl cuartos legs
    5) (=moneda) coin used in Spain in former times
    pl cuartos * (=dinero) dough * sing
    6) (Tip) quarto
    7)

    estar de cuarto — (Mil) to be on watch

    8) †† (=piso) small flat
    9) †† (=servidumbre) household, servants pl
    * * *
    I
    - ta adjetivo/pronombre
    b) ( partitivo)
    II
    1) ( habitación) room; ( dormitorio) room, bedroom
    2)
    a) ( cuarta parte) quarter

    de tres al cuarto — (fam) third-rate

    qué... ni qué ocho cuartos! — (fam)

    qué miedo ni qué ocho cuartos! — scared, my foot!

    tu hermana es una vaga... y tú, tres cuartos de lo mismo — your sister's bone-idle... and you're not much better (colloq)

    la una y cuarto — (a) quarter after (AmE) o (BrE) past one, one fifteen

    es un cuarto para las dos or (Esp, RPl) son las dos menos cuarto — it is a quarter to two

    tener su cuarto de hora — (AmS) to have had one's day

    3) (Impr) quarto
    4) (Esp fam) ( dinero)
    III
    - ta adjetivo (Col fam) < persona> generous and easygoing
    * * *
    I
    - ta adjetivo/pronombre
    b) ( partitivo)
    II
    1) ( habitación) room; ( dormitorio) room, bedroom
    2)
    a) ( cuarta parte) quarter

    de tres al cuarto — (fam) third-rate

    qué... ni qué ocho cuartos! — (fam)

    qué miedo ni qué ocho cuartos! — scared, my foot!

    tu hermana es una vaga... y tú, tres cuartos de lo mismo — your sister's bone-idle... and you're not much better (colloq)

    la una y cuarto — (a) quarter after (AmE) o (BrE) past one, one fifteen

    es un cuarto para las dos or (Esp, RPl) son las dos menos cuarto — it is a quarter to two

    tener su cuarto de hora — (AmS) to have had one's day

    3) (Impr) quarto
    4) (Esp fam) ( dinero)
    III
    - ta adjetivo (Col fam) < persona> generous and easygoing
    * * *
    cuarto1 (4º)
    = fourth (4th), quarter, quarto, fourthly.

    Ex: Further post-co-ordinate indexes covering in excess of 9999 documents can be compiled by starting a second and possibly a third or fourth set of cards.

    Ex: The old method of publication by syndicates of retail booksellers (who might also be wholesalers and/or printers) remained normal during the last quarter of the eighteenth century.
    Ex: A format is the number of times the printed sheet has been folded to make the leaves of a book, e.g., folio (one fold giving two leaves), quarto (two folds giving four leaves), etc.
    Ex: Fourthly, it legalized the application of future Community regulations to the United Kingdom.
    * 4º (cuarto) = 4th (fourth).
    * alumno de cuarto = fourth grader.
    * alumno de cuarto año = fourth grader.
    * alumno de cuarto curso = fourth grader.
    * alumno de cuarto grado = fourth grader.
    * cuarto de penique = farthing.
    * cuartos de final = quarter-finals.
    * encuadernado en cuarto = quarter-bound.
    * en cuarto lugar = fourthly.
    * tres cuartos (3/4) = three-quarters (3/4).
    * tres cuartos (3/4) = three-fourths (3/4).
    * una cuarta parte = one-quarter (1/4), one in four.
    * una cuarta parte de = a fourth of.
    * un cuarto = one-quarter (1/4), one in four.
    * un cuarto (1/4) = one fourth (1/4).
    * un cuarto de = a quarter of.

    cuarto2
    2 = room.

    Ex: The open-plan flexible library can be enonomical since overseeing is facilitated by the openness rather than be dividing the building into rooms or halls, thereby requiring less staff.

    * armario de cuarto de baño = bathroom cabinet.
    * cuarto de baño = bathroom.
    * cuarto de huéspedes = spare room, guest room.
    * cuarto de invitados = spare room, guest room.
    * cuarto de juegos = playroom.
    * cuarto de los juguetes = playroom.
    * cuarto oscuro = darkroom.
    * cuarto oscuro de fotografía = photographic darkroom.
    * cuarto para visitas = spare room, guest room.

    * * *
    cuarto1 -ta
    adjective / pronoun
    2
    (partitivo): la cuarta parte a quarter
    Compuesto:
    feminine fourth dimension
    A (habitación) room; (dormitorio) room, bedroom
    hacerle cuarto a algn ( Col fam); to cover (up) for sb
    Compuestos:
    ≈ downstairs lavatory o ( BrE) cloakroom, bathroom ( AmE)
    bathroom
    sewing room
    living room, parlor ( AmE), sitting room ( BrE)
    guest room, spare room
    ironing room
    ( Esp) guest room, spare room
    engine room
    maid's room
    cold store
    ( RPl) recess
    pasar a cuarto intermedio to adjourn, go into recess
    ( Fot) darkroom; ( RPl) ( Pol) ≈ polling booth
    lumber room, junk room
    B
    un cuarto de kilo or ( colloq) un cuarto kilo de jamón a quarter of ham, a quarter (of a) kilo of ham
    un cuarto de pollo a quarter chicken
    un cuarto de millón/siglo a quarter of a million/century
    de tres al cuarto ( fam); third-rate
    ¡qué … ni qué ocho cuartos! ( fam): ¡qué miedo ni qué ocho cuartos! scared, my foot!
    ¡qué vacaciones ni qué ocho cuartos! it was hardly what I'd call a vacation!
    tres cuartos de lo mismo ( fam): tu hermana es una vaga … y tú, tres cuartos de lo mismo your sister's bone-idle … and you're not much better ( colloq)
    nunca tengo tiempo para nada — a mí me pasa tres cuartos de lo mismo I never seem to have time to do anything — that makes two of us o you're not the only one
    un cuarto de hora a quarter of an hour
    las clases son de tres cuartos de hora the classes last three quarters of an hour
    una hora y (un) cuarto an hour and a quarter
    la una y cuarto (a) quarter after ( AmE) o ( BrE) past one, one fifteen
    son las dos menos cuartoor ( AmL exc RPI) es un cuarto para las dos it is a quarter to two
    tuvo su cuarto de hora a fines de los 60 he had his heyday in the late 60s
    C ( Impr) quarto
    en cuarto, 416 páginas quarto, 416 pages
    Compuestos:
    first quarter
    forequarter
    last quarter
    mpl quarterfinals (pl)
    hindquarter
    D
    ( Esp fam) (dinero): estoy sin un cuartoor no tengo ni un cuarto I haven't got a bean, I'm absolutely broke ( colloq)
    tiene muchos cuartos he's loaded ( colloq), he's rolling in money ( colloq)
    le pagan cuatro cuartos he gets paid peanuts o a pittance ( colloq)
    echar su cuarto a espadas ( Esp); to stick one's oar in ( colloq)
    cuarto3 -ta
    ( Col fam) ‹persona› generous and easygoing
    * * *

     

    cuarto 1
    ◊ -ta adjetivo/pronombre

    fourth;
    la cuarta parte a quarter;
    para ejemplos ver quinto
    cuarto 2 sustantivo masculino
    1 ( habitación) room;
    ( dormitorio) room, bedroom;

    cuarto de estar living room, parlor (AmE), sitting room (BrE);
    cuarto de (los) huéspedes guest room, spare room;
    cuarto trastero lumber room, junk room
    2


    un cuarto de pollo a quarter chicken;
    cuarto creciente/menguante first/last quarter;
    cuartos de final quarterfinals (pl)


    la una y cuarto (a) quarter after (AmE) o (BrE) past one, one fifteen;
    es un cuarto para las dos or (Esp, RPl) son las dos menos cuarto it is a quarter to two
    cuarto,-a
    I adjetivo & sustantivo masculino y femenino fourth
    II sustantivo masculino
    1 (habitación) room
    cuarto de baño, bathroom
    cuarto de estar, living room
    cuarto trastero, boxroom, storage room
    2 (cuarta parte) quarter
    cuarto de hora, quarter of an hour
    cuarto (de) kilo, a quarter of a kilo
    cuarto creciente/menguante, first/last quarter (of the moon)
    3 (de un animal) cuarto delantero, shoulderquarter
    cuarto trasero, hindquarter
    4 cuartos, fam (dinero) dough, money
    Dep cuartos de final, quarter finals
    III sustantivo femenino
    1 Mús (intervalo) cuarta disminuida/aumentada, diminished/augmented fourth
    2 Auto fourth (gear)
    ' cuarto' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    aseo
    - baño
    - cisterna
    - comunicarse
    - creciente
    - cuarta
    - desvestirse
    - estancia
    - hoy
    - iluminada
    - iluminado
    - lavabo
    - leonera
    - retrete
    - servicio
    - tocador
    - tres
    - viciar
    - airear
    - alzar
    - armario
    - chisme
    - desorden
    - encerrado
    - habitación
    - menos
    - sanitario
    - soledad
    - trasto
    - váter
    - wáter
    English:
    amiss
    - basin
    - bathroom
    - crescent
    - darkroom
    - disinfectant
    - fourth
    - lavatory
    - messy
    - modernize
    - nursery
    - of
    - playroom
    - quart
    - quarter
    - quarter-final
    - reverberate
    - room
    - roomful
    - shut away
    - study
    - stuffy
    - succession
    - tidy out
    - toilet
    - utility room
    - wander
    - adjoin
    - after
    - bath
    - bed
    - creep
    - den
    - fourthly
    - guest
    - mother
    - play
    - rank
    - self
    - shut
    - sirloin
    - spare
    - straight
    - two
    - utility
    * * *
    cuarto, -a
    ♦ núm
    fourth;
    la cuarta parte a quarter;
    RP Fam
    de cuarta fourth-rate
    cuarto árbitro [en fútbol] fourth official;
    la cuarta dimensión the fourth dimension;
    el cuarto poder [la prensa] the Fourth Estate;
    ver también octavo
    ♦ nm
    1. [parte] quarter;
    póngame un cuarto de merluza (I'd like) a quarter kilo of hake, please;
    Fam
    ni qué ocho cuartos: ¡qué fiesta ni qué ocho cuartos, tú te quedas en casa! I don't care whether there's a party or not, you're staying at home!;
    Fam
    ser tres cuartos de lo mismo to be exactly the same o no different;
    uno es aburrido, y el otro tres cuartos de lo mismo one is a bore and the other one is not much better
    cuarto creciente first quarter [of moon]; Dep cuartos de final quarter finals;
    cuarto menguante last quarter [of moon]
    2. [de hora] quarter;
    un cuarto de hora a quarter of an hour;
    tres cuartos de hora three quarters of an hour;
    son las dos y cuarto it's a quarter Br past o US after two;
    son las dos menos cuarto, Am [m5] es un cuarto para las dos it's a quarter to two;
    una hora y cuarto an hour and a quarter;
    Am
    ya pasó su cuarto de hora he's had his time in the sun, his glory days are over
    3. [curso universitario] fourth year
    4. [curso escolar] = fourth year of primary school, US ≈ fourth grade
    5. [de animal] quarter;
    los cuartos delanteros/traseros front quarters/hindquarters
    6. [habitación] room
    cuarto de aseo washroom, small bathroom;
    cuarto de baño bathroom;
    Col cuarto de chécheres junk o lumber room;
    cuarto de estar living-room;
    cuarto de juegos playroom, US rumpus room;
    cuarto oscuro [para revelar fotografía] darkroom;
    RP cuarto secreto [cabina electoral] voting booth;
    cuarto trastero lumber room
    7. [dinero]
    estar sin un cuarto to be broke;
    Fam
    cuartos dough, cash
    8. Dep [periodo] quarter
    9. RP cuarto intermedio [receso] recess, adjournment;
    la asamblea pasó a cuarto intermedio the meeting adjourned o went into recess;
    discutieron tres temas y pasaron a cuarto intermedio they discussed three topics and then adjourned
    * * *
    I adj fourth
    II m
    1 ( habitación) room
    2 ( parte), DEP quarter;
    cuarto de hora quarter of an hour;
    cuarto de kilo quarter of a kilo;
    las diez y cuarto (a) quarter after o Br past ten;
    las tres menos cuarto a quarter to three, quarter of three;
    de tres al cuarto fam third-rate;
    tres cuartos prenda three-quarter length
    3
    :
    cuartos pl pop dough sg fam, Br tb
    dosh sg fam ;
    estar sin un cuarto be broke fam
    * * *
    cuarto, -ta adj
    : fourth
    cuarto, -ta n
    : fourth (in a series)
    cuarto nm
    1) : quarter, fourth
    cuarto de galón: quart
    2) habitación: room
    * * *
    cuarto1 n
    ¡vete a tu cuarto! go to your room!
    2. (cuarta parte) quarter
    cuarto2 num fourth

    Spanish-English dictionary > cuarto

  • 9 coprire

    cover
    errore, suono cover up
    * * *
    coprire v.tr.
    1 to cover (up) (anche fig.): il divano era coperto con un telo bianco, the couch was covered with a white sheet; se copri la pentola l'acqua bollirà prima, if you cover the pot the water will boil more quickly; si coprì il volto con le mani e pianse, he covered his face with his hands and sobbed; la neve aveva coperto tutta la campagna, the countryside was covered with snow; Mark aveva le braccia coperte di lividi, Mark's arms were covered with bruises; l'edera copriva tutto il muro, the wall was entirely covered (o overgrown) with ivy; copri bene il bambino, wrap the baby up warmly; copriti le spalle!, cover your shoulders up // (cuc.): coprire una torta di panna, to top a cake with cream; faccio coprire la torta con glassa al cioccolato, I'll have the cake topped with chocolate icing // (med.) coprire un dente con una capsula, to cap a tooth // (edil.): coprire di piastrelle, to tile; coprire di moquette, to carpet; coprire d'intonaco, to plaster // coprire di baci, di ingiurie, to cover with kisses, with abuse; coprire di gentilezze, to overwhelm (o to shower) with kindness; coprire di gloria, di onore, to cover with glory, with honour
    2 ( occultare) to cover (up): grossi nuvoloni coprirono il sole, large dark clouds covered (up) the sun; puoi coprire lo strappo con una toppa, you can cover (up) the tear with a patch; è inutile che tu cerchi di coprire i suoi errori, it's pointless for you to try and cover up his mistakes; non cercare di coprirlo, don't try and cover up for him; la musica coprì le sue parole, the music drowned out (o covered) his words
    3 ( difendere) to cover: la nostra ritirata verrà coperta dall'artiglieria, the artillery will cover our retreat; copritemi ( alle spalle)!, cover me! // coprire il re, ( scacchi) to guard the king
    4 (comm.) ( far fronte) to meet*; ( garantire) to cover: la mia assicurazione mi copre da ogni rischio, my insurance covers me against all risks; coprire le spese, to meet (o cover) expenses
    5 ( includere) to cover: è una regola che copre tutti i casi, it's a rule that covers all cases
    6 ( occupare) to hold*; ( andare a occupare) to fill: copre da anni quella carica, he has been holding that office for years; chi copre la cattedra di inglese?, who holds the chair of English?; chi coprirà il posto rimasto vacante?, who will fill the vacancy?
    7 ( distanza) to cover, to do*: il vincitore ha coperto la distanza in un'ora, the winner covered (o did) the distance in an hour
    8 (zool.) ( montare) to cover; ( di montone) to tup
    9 ( stampa, rad., tv) to cover.
    ◘ coprirsi v.rifl.
    1 to cover oneself (up): copriti bene perché fa un gran freddo, cover yourself up (o wrap yourself up) warmly because it's very cold; pensi sia necessario coprire?, do you think we ought to wear something warm? // coprire di gloria, di onore, to cover oneself with glory, with honour; coprire di vergogna, to bring shame upon oneself // coprire di debiti, to get deep into debt
    2 (comm.) ( garantirsi) to cover oneself: voglio coprirmi da ogni rischio, I want to cover (o insure) myself against all risks
    3 (sport) to guard; to be* on one's guard
    ◆ v.intr.pron.
    1 to be* covered; to get* covered: in primavera i campi si coprono di fiori, in spring the fields are covered with flowers; l'inferriata si è coperta di ruggine, the railings have got covered with rust; nel riordinare mi sono tutto coperto di polvere, I got all covered with dust while tidying up; si è tutto coperto di vesciche, he got covered all over with blisters // coprire di squame, to scale
    2 ( rannuvolarsi) to become* overcast.
    * * *
    1. [ko'prire]
    vb irreg vt
    (gen) to cover, (occupare: carica, posto) to hold, (persona: proteggere: anche), fig to cover, shield, (fig : suono) to drown, (segreto, sentimenti) to conceal

    coprire di o con — (gen) to cover with

    coprire qn di insulti/di doni — to shower insults/gifts on sb

    coprire un rischio Econ, Assicurazione — to cover a risk

    (persona) to wrap (o.s.) up, Assicurazione

    coprirsi contro — to insure o.s. against

    coprirsi di gloria/di ridicolo — to cover o.s. with glory/with ridicule

    3. vip (coprirsi)
    (cielo) to cloud over

    (rivestirsi) coprirsi di — (muffa, macchie) to be covered in

    * * *
    [ko'prire] 1.
    verbo transitivo
    1) (ricoprire) to cover [oggetto, ferito] ( con with)
    2) (chiudere) to cover, to put* the lid on [ pentola]
    3) (avvolgere) [nebbia, neve, strato] to cover, to envelop [città, superficie]
    4) (nascondere alla vista) to hide*, to cover up

    coprire la vista a qcn. — to block sb.'s view

    coprire qcn. di — to shower sb. with, to shower [sth.] on sb. [doni, complimenti]; to cover sb. with [ baci]

    6) (contro il freddo) (con abiti) to wrap [sb.] up; (a letto) to cover [sb.] up
    7) (essere più forte di) to cover [suono, odore]
    8) (proteggere) (nascondendo la verità) to cover up for [amico, collega]; mil. sport to cover [soldato, zona del campo]

    coprire le spalle a qcn. — to cover sb.'s back

    9) (occupare, esercitare) to hold*, to fill [ carica]
    10) (percorrere) [corridore, veicolo] to cover [ distanza]
    11) (servire) [trasmettitore, radio, ispettore] to cover [ area]
    12) econ. [ somma] to cover [spese, costi]
    13) econ. (garantire) to cover [danno, rischio, persona]; to make* up for [ ammanco]
    14) [ maschio] to cover [ femmina]
    2.
    verbo pronominale coprirsi
    1) (vestirsi) to wrap up, to cover oneself up
    2) meteor. [ cielo] to become* cloudy, overcast, to cloud over
    4) econ.
    * * *
    coprire
    /ko'prire/ [91]
     1 (ricoprire) to cover [oggetto, ferito] ( con with)
     2 (chiudere) to cover, to put* the lid on [ pentola]
     3 (avvolgere) [nebbia, neve, strato] to cover, to envelop [città, superficie]
     4 (nascondere alla vista) to hide*, to cover up; coprire la vista a qcn. to block sb.'s view
     5 (dare in grande quantità) coprire qcn. di to shower sb. with, to shower [sth.] on sb. [doni, complimenti]; to cover sb. with [ baci]
     6 (contro il freddo) (con abiti) to wrap [sb.] up; (a letto) to cover [sb.] up
     7 (essere più forte di) to cover [suono, odore]
     8 (proteggere) (nascondendo la verità) to cover up for [amico, collega]; mil. sport to cover [soldato, zona del campo]; coprire le spalle a qcn. to cover sb.'s back
     9 (occupare, esercitare) to hold*, to fill [ carica]
     10 (percorrere) [corridore, veicolo] to cover [ distanza]
     11 (servire) [trasmettitore, radio, ispettore] to cover [ area]
     12 econ. [ somma] to cover [spese, costi]
     13 econ. (garantire) to cover [danno, rischio, persona]; to make* up for [ ammanco]
     14 [ maschio] to cover [ femmina]
    II coprirsi verbo pronominale
     1 (vestirsi) to wrap up, to cover oneself up
     2 meteor. [ cielo] to become* cloudy, overcast, to cloud over
     3 (riempirsi) - rsi di to become covered with; - rsi di gloria to cover oneself with glory
     4 econ. - rsi contro to cover oneself against.

    Dizionario Italiano-Inglese > coprire

  • 10 ब्रह्मन् _brahman

    ब्रह्मन् n. [बृंह्-मनिन् नकारस्याकारे ऋतो रत्वम्; cf. Uṇ.4.145.]
    1 The Supreme Being, regarded as impersonal and divested of all quality and action; (according to the Vedāntins, Brahman is both the efficient and the mate- rial cause of the visible universe, the all-pervading soul and spirit of the universe, the essence from which all created things are produced and into which they are absorbed; अस्ति तावन्नित्यशुद्धबुद्धमुक्तस्वभावं सर्वज्ञं सर्वशक्तिसमन्वितं ब्रह्म Ś. B.);... यत्प्रयन्त्यभिसंविशन्ति । तद् विजिज्ञा- सस्व । तद् ब्रह्मेति Tai. Up.3.1; समीभूता दृष्टिस्त्रिभुवनमपि ब्रह्म मनुते Bh.3.84; Ku.3.15; दर्शनं तस्य लाभः स्यात् त्वं हि ब्रह्ममयो निधिः Mb.
    -2 A hymn of praise.
    -3 A sacred text; मैवं स्याद् ब्रह्मविक्रिया Bhāg.9.1.17.
    -4 The Vedas; ब्रह्मणः प्रणवं कुर्यात् Ms.2.74; यद् ब्रह्म सम्यगाम्नातम् Ku.6.16; U.1.15; समस्तवदनोद्गीतब्रह्मणे ब्रह्मणे नमः Bm.1.1; Bg.3.15.
    -5 The sacred and mystic syllable om; एकाक्षरं परं ब्रह्म Ms.2.83.
    -6 The priestly of Brahmanical class (collectively); तदेतद् ब्रह्म क्षत्रं विट् शूद्रः Bṛi. Up.1.4.15; ब्रह्मैव संनियन्तृ स्यात् क्षत्रं हि ब्रह्मसंभवम् Ms.9.32.
    -7 The power or energy of a Brāhmaṇa; पवनाग्निसमागमो ह्ययं सहितं ब्रह्म यदस्त्रतेजसा R.8.4.
    -8 Religious penance or austerities.
    -9 Celi- bacy, chastity; शाश्वते ब्रह्मणि वर्तते Ś.1.
    -1 Final eman- cipation or beatitude.
    -11 Theology, sacred learning, religious knowledge.
    -12 The Brāhmaṇa portion of the Veda.
    -13 Wealth.
    -14 Food.
    -15 A Brāhmaṇa.
    -16 Truth.
    -17 The Brāhmaṇahood (ब्राह्मणत्व); येन विप्लावितं ब्रह्म वृषल्यां जायतात्मना Bhāg.6.2.26.
    -18 The soul (आत्मा); एतदेषां ब्रह्म Bṛi. Up.1.6.1-3.
    -19 See ब्रह्मास्त्र. अब्राह्मणे न हि ब्रह्म ध्रुवं तिष्ठेत् कदाचन Mb.12.3.31.
    -2 The गायत्री mantra; उभे सन्ध्ये च यतवाग्जपन् ब्रह्म समाहितः Bhāg.7. 12.2. -m.
    1 The Supreme Being, the Creator, the first deity of the sacred Hindu Trinity, to whom is en- trusted the work of creating the world. [The accounts of the creation of the world differ in many respects; but, according to Manu Smṛiti, the universe was enveloped in darkness, and the self-existent Lord manifested himself dispelling the gloom. He first created the waters and deposited in them a seed. This seed became a golden egg, in which he himself was born as Brahmā-- the progenitor of all the worlds. Then the Lord divided the egg into two parts, with which he constructed heaven and earth. He then created the ten Prajāpatis or mind-born sons who completed the work of creation. According to another account (Rāmāyaṇa) Brahmā sprang from ether; from him was descended marīchi, and his son was Kaśyapa. From Kaśyapa sprang Vivasvata, and Manu sprang from him. Thus Manu was the procreator of all human beings. According to a third account, the Supreme deity, after dividing the golden egg, separated himself into two parts, male and female, from which sprang Virāj and from him Manu; cf. Ku.2.7. and Ms.1.32 et seq. Mythologically Brahman is represented as being born in a lotus which sprang from the navel of Viṣṇu, and as creating the world by an illicit connection with his own daughter Sarasvatī. Brahman had originally five heads, but one of them was cut down by Śiva with the ring-finger or burnt down by the fire from his third eye. His vehicle is a swan. He has numerous epithets, most of which have reference to his birth, in a lotus.]
    -2 A Brāhmaṇa; Ś.4.4.
    -3 A devout man.
    -4 One of the four Ritvijas or priests employed at a Soma sacrifice.
    -5 One conversant with sacred knowledge.
    -6 The sun.
    -7 Intellect.
    -8 An epithet of the seven Prajāpatis:-- मरीचि, अत्रि, अङ्गिरस्, पुलस्त्य, पुलह, क्रतु and वसिष्ठ.
    -9 An epithet of Bṛihaspati; ब्रह्मन्नध्ययनस्य नैष समयस्तूष्णीं बहिः स्थीयताम् Hanumannāṭaka.
    -1 The planet Jupiter; ब्रह्मराशिं समावृत्य लोहिताङ्गो व्यवस्थितः Mb. 3.6.18.
    -11 The world of Brahmā (ब्रह्मलोक); दमस्त्यागो- $प्रमादश्च ते त्रयो ब्रह्मणो हयाः Mb.11.7.23.
    -1 Of Śiva.
    -Comp. -अक्षरम् the sacred syllable om.
    -अङ्गभूः 1 a horse.
    -2 one who has touched the several parts of his body by the repetition of Mantras; स च त्वदेकेषुनिपात- साध्यो ब्रह्माङ्गभूर्ब्रह्मणि योजितात्मा Ku.3.15 (see Malli. thereon).
    -अञ्जलिः 1 respectful salutation with folded hands while repeating the Veda.
    -2 obeisance to a preceptor (at the beginning and conclusion of the repetition of the Veda); अपश्यद्यावतो वेदविदां ब्रह्माञ्जलीनसौ N.17.183; ब्रह्मारम्भे$वसाने च पादौ ग्राह्यौ गुरोः सदा । संहत्य हस्तावध्येयं स हि ब्रह्माञ्जलिः स्मृतः ॥ Ms.2.71.
    -अण्डम् 'the egg of Brahman', the primordial egg from which the universe sprang, the world, universe; ब्रह्माण्डच्छत्रदण्डः Dk.1. ˚कपालः the hemisphere of the world. ˚भाण्डोदरम् the hollow of the universe; ब्रह्मा येन कुलालवन्नियमितो ब्रह्माण्ड- भाण्डोदरे Bh.2.95. ˚पुराणम् N. of one of the eighteen Purāṇas.
    -अदि(द्रि)जाता an epithet of the river Godāvarī.
    -अधिगमः, अधिगमनम् study of the Vedas.
    -अम्भस् n. the urine of a cow.
    -अभ्यासः the study of the Vedas.
    -अयणः, -नः an epithet of Nārāyaṇa.
    -अरण्यम् 1 a place of religious study.
    -2 N. of a forest.
    -अर्पणम् 1 the offering of sacred knowledge.
    -2 devoting oneself to the Supreme Spirit.
    -3 N. of a spell.
    -4 a mode of performing the Śrāddha in which no Piṇḍas or rice-balls are offered.
    -अस्त्रम् a missile presided over by Brahman.
    -आत्मभूः a horse.
    -आनन्दः bliss or rapture of absorption into Brahma; ब्रह्मानन्दसाक्षात्क्रियां Mv.7.31.
    -आरम्भः beginning to repeat the Vedas; Ms.2.71.
    -आवर्तः N. of the tract between the rivers Sarasvatī and Dṛiṣavatī (northwest of Hastināpura); सरस्वतीदृषद्वत्योर्देवनद्योर्यदन्तरम् । तं देवनिर्मितं देशं ब्रह्मावर्तं प्रचक्षते Ms.2.17,19; Me.5.
    -आश्रमः = ब्रह्मचर्याश्रमः; वेदाध्ययननित्यत्वं क्षमा$थाचार्यपूजनम् । अथोपाध्यायशुश्रूषा ब्रह्माश्रमपदं भवेत् ॥ Mb.12.66.14.
    -आसनम् a particular position for profound meditation.
    -आहुतिः f.
    1 the offering of prayers; see ब्रह्मयज्ञ.
    -2 the study of the Vedas.
    -उज्झता forgetting or neglecting the Vedas; Ms.11.57 (अधीतवेदस्यानभ्यासेन विस्मरणम् Kull.).
    -उत्तर a.
    1 treating principally of Brahman.
    -2 consisting chiefly of Brāhmaṇas.
    -उद्यम् explaining the Veda, treatment or discussion of theological problems; ब्राह्मणा भगवन्तो हन्ताहमिमं द्वौ प्रश्नौ प्रक्ष्यामि तौ चेन्मे वक्ष्यति न वै जातु युष्माकमिमं कश्चिद् ब्रह्मोद्यं जेतेति Bṛi. Up.
    -उपदेशः instruc- tion in the Vedas or sacred knowledge. ˚नेतृ m. the Palāśa tree.
    -ऋषिः (
    ब्रह्मर्षिः or
    ब्रह्माऋषिः) a Bra- hmanical sage. ˚देशः N. of a district; (कुरुक्षेत्रं च मत्स्याश्च पञ्चालाः शूरसेनकाः । एष ब्रह्मर्षिदेशो वै ब्रह्मावर्तादनन्तरः Ms.2.19).
    -ओदनः, -नम् food given to the priests at a sacrifice.
    -कन्यका an epithet of Sarasvatī.
    -करः a tax paid to the priestly class.
    -कर्मन् n.
    1 the religious duties of a Brāhmaṇa, the office of Brahman, one of the four principal priests at a sacrifice.
    -कला an epithet of Dākṣāyaṇī (who dwells in the heart of man).
    -कल्पः an age of Brahman.
    -काण्डम् the portion of the Veda relating to spiritual knowledge.
    -काष्ठः the mulberry tree.
    -किल्बिषम् an offence against Brāhmaṇas.
    -कूटः a thoroughly learned Brāhmaṇa.
    -कूर्चम् a kind of penance; अहोरात्रोषितो भूत्वा पौर्णमास्यां विशेषतः । पञ्चगव्यं पिबेत् प्रातर्ब्रह्मकूर्चमिति स्मृतम् ॥.
    -कृत् one who prays. (-m.) an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -कोशः the treasure of the Vedas, the entire collection of the Vedas; क्षात्रो धर्मः श्रित इव तनुं ब्रह्मकोशस्य गुप्त्यै U.6.9.
    -गायत्री N. of a magical mantra composed after the model of गायत्री mantra.
    -गिरिः N. of a mountain.
    -गीता f. The preaching of Brahmā as included in the Anuśāsana parva of the Mahābhārata.
    -गुप्तः N. of an astronomer born in 598. A. D.
    -गोलः the universe.
    -गौरवम् respect for the missile presided over by Brahman; विष्कम्भितुं समर्थो$पि ना$चलद् ब्रह्मगौरवात् Bk.9.76 (मा भून्मोघो ब्राह्मः पाश इति).
    -ग्रन्थिः 1 N. of a particular joint of the body.
    -2 N. of the knot which ties together the 3 threads of the यज्ञोपवीत.
    -ग्रहः, -पिशाचः, -पुरुषः, -रक्षस् n.,
    -राक्षसः a kind of ghost, the ghost of a Brāhmaṇa, who during his life time indulges in a disdainful spirit and carries away the wives of others and the property of Brāh- maṇas; (परस्य योषितं हृत्वा ब्रह्मस्वमपहृत्य च । अरण्ये निर्जले देशे भवति ब्रह्मराक्षसः ॥ Y.3.212; cf. Ms.12.6 also).
    -ग्राहिन् a. worthy to receive that which is holy.
    -घातकः, -घातिन् m. the murderer of a Brāhmaṇa.
    -घातिनी a woman on the second day of her courses.
    -घोषः 1 recital of the Veda.
    -2 the sacred word, the Vedas collectively; U.6.9 (v. l.).
    -घ्नः the murderer of a Brāhmaṇa.
    -चक्रम् 1 The circle of the universe; Śvet. Up.
    -2 N. of a magical circle.
    -चर्यम् 1 religious studentship, the life of celibacy passed by a Brāhmaṇa boy in studying the Vedas, the first stage or order of his life; अविप्लुतब्रह्मचर्यो गृहस्थाश्रममाचरेत् Ms.3.2;2. 249; Mv.1.24; यदिच्छन्तो ब्रह्मचर्यं चरन्ति तत्ते पदं संग्रहेण ब्रवीम्योमित्येतत् Kaṭh.
    -2 religious study, self-restraint.
    -3 celibacy, chastity, abstinence, continence; also ब्रह्म- चर्याश्रम. (
    -र्यः) a religious student; see ब्रह्मचारिन्. (
    -र्या) chastity, celibacy. ˚व्रतम् a vow of chastity. ˚स्खलनम् falling off from chastity, incontinence.
    -चारिकम् the life of a religious student.
    -चारिन् a.
    1 studying the Vedas.
    -2 practising continence of chastity. (-m.) a religious student, a Brāhmaṇa in the first order of his life, who continues to live with his spiritual guide from the investiture with sacred thread and performs the duties pertaining to his order till he settles in life; ब्रह्मचारी वेदमधीत्य वेदौ वेदान् वा चरेद् ब्रह्मचर्यम् Kaṭha- śrutyopaniṣad 17; Ms.2.41,175;6.87.
    -2 one who vows to lead the life of a celibate.
    -3 an epithet of Śiva.
    -4 of Skanda.
    -चारिणी 1 an epithet of Durgā.
    -2 a woman who observes the vow of chastity.
    -जः an epithet of Kārtikeya.
    -जन्मन् n.
    1 spirtual birth.
    -2 investiture with the sacred thread; ब्रह्मजन्म हि विप्रस्य प्रेत्य चेह च शाश्वतम् Ms.2.146,17.
    -जारः the paramour of a Brāhmaṇa's wife; Rāmtā. Up.
    -जिज्ञासा desire to know Brahman; अयातो ब्रह्मजिज्ञासा Brahmasūtra.
    -जीविन् a. living by sacred knowledge. (-m.) a mercenary Brāhmaṇa (who converts his sacred knowledge into trade), a Brāhmaṇa who lives by sacred knowledge.
    -ज्ञानम् knowledge about Brahman; वेदान्तसाङ्ख्यसिद्धान्त- ब्रह्मज्ञानं वदाम्यहम् Garuḍa. P.
    -ज्ञ, -ज्ञानिन् a. one who knows Brahma.
    (-ज्ञः) 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya.
    -2 of Viṣṇu.
    -ज्ञानम् true or divine knowledge, knowledge of the identity of the universe with Brahma; ब्रह्मज्ञान- प्रभासंध्याकालो गच्छति धीमताम् Paśupata. Up.7.
    -ज्येष्ठः the elder brother of Brahman; ब्रह्मज्येष्ठमुपासते T. Up.2.5. (-a.) having Brahmā as first or chief.
    -ज्योतिस् n.
    1 the light of Brahma or the Supreme Being.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -तत्त्वम् the true knowledge of the Supreme Spirit.
    -तन्त्रम् all that is taught in the Veda.
    -तालः (in music) a kind of measure.
    -तेजस् n.
    1 the glory of Brahman.
    -2 Brahmanic lustre, the lustre or glory supposed to surround a Brāhmaṇa.
    -दः a spiritual preceptor; Ms.4.232.
    -दण्डः 1 the curse of a Brāhmaṇa; एकेन ब्रह्मदण्डेन बहवो नाशिता मम Rām.
    -2 a tribute paid to a Brāhmaṇa.
    -3 an epithet of Śiva.
    -4 N. of a mythical weapon (ब्रह्मास्त्र); स्वरस्य रामो जग्राह ब्रह्मदण्डमिवापरम् Rām.3.3.24.
    -5 magic, spells, incanta- tion (अभिचार); ब्रह्मदण्डमदृष्टेषु दृष्टेषु चतुरङ्गिणीम् Mb.12. 13.27.
    -दर्मा Ptychotis Ajowan (Mar. ओवा).
    -दानम् 1 the imparting of sacred knowledge.
    -2 sacred knowledge, received as an inheritance or hereditary gift; सर्वेषामेव दानानां ब्रह्मदानं विशिष्यते Ms.4.233.
    -दायः 1 instruction in the Vedas, the imparting of sacred knowledge.
    -2 sacred knowledge received as an in- heritance; तं प्रतीतं स्वधर्मेण ब्रह्मदायहरं पितुः Ms.3.3.
    -3 the earthly possession of a Brāhmaṇa.
    -दायादः 1 one who receives the Vedas as his hereditary gift, a Brāhmaṇa.
    -2 the son of a Brāhmaṇa.
    -दारुः the mulberry tree.
    -दिनम् a day of Brahman.
    -दूषक a. falsifying the vedic texts; Hch.
    -देय a. married according to the Brāhma form of marriage; ब्रह्मदेयात्मसंतानो ज्येष्ठसामग एव च Ms.3.185. (
    -यः) the Brāhma form of marriage.
    (-यम्) 1 land granted to Brahmaṇas; श्रोत्रियेभ्यो ब्रह्मदेयान्यदण्डकराण्यभिरूपदायकानि प्रयच्छेत् Kau. A.2.1.19.
    -2 instruction in the sacred knowledge.
    -दैत्यः a Brāhmaṇa changed into a demon; cf. ब्रह्मग्रह.
    -द्वारम् entrance into Brahmā; ब्रह्मद्वारमिदमित्येवैतदाह यस्त- पसाहतपाप्मा Maitra. Up.4.4.
    -द्विष्, -द्वेषिन् a.
    1 hating Brāhmaṇas; Ms.3.154 (Kull.).
    -2 hostile to religi- ous acts or devotion, impious, godless.
    -द्वेषः hatred of Brāhmaṇas.
    -धर a. possessing sacred knowledge.
    -नदी an epithet of the river Sarasvatī.
    -नाभः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -निर्वाणम् absorption into the Supreme Spirit; स्थित्वास्यामन्तकाले$पि ब्रह्मनिर्वाणमृच्छति Bg.2.72.
    -2 = ब्रह्मानन्द q. v.; तं ब्रह्मनिर्वाणसमाधिमाश्रितम् Bhāg.4.6.39.
    -निष्ठ a. absorbed in or intent on the contemplation of the Supreme Spirit; ब्रह्मनिष्ठस्तथा योगी पृथग्भावं न विन्दति Aman. Up.1.31. (
    -ष्ठः) the mulberry tree.
    -नीडम् the resting-place of Brahman.
    -पदम् 1 the rank or position of a Brāhmaṇa.
    -2 the place of the Supreme Spirit.
    -पवित्रः the Kuśa grass.
    -परिषद् f. an assembly of Brāhmṇas.
    -पादपः, -पत्रः the Palāśa tree.
    -पारः the final object of all sacred knowledge.
    -पारायणम् a complete study of the Vedas, the entire Veda; याज्ञवल्क्यो मुनिर्यस्मै ब्रह्मपारायणं जगौ U.4.9; Mv.1.14.
    -पाशः N. of a missile presided over by Brahman; अबध्नादपरिस्कन्दं ब्रह्मपाशेन विस्फुरन् Bk.9.75.
    -पितृ m. an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -पुत्रः 1 a son of Brahman.
    -2 N. of a (male) river which rises in the eastern extremity of the Himālaya and falls with the Ganges into the Bay of Bengal.
    (-त्रा) 1 a kind of vegetable poison.
    -2 See ब्रह्मपुत्रः (2). (
    -त्री) an epithet of the river Sarasvatī.
    -पुरम् the heart; दिव्ये ब्रह्मपुरे ह्येष व्योम्न्यात्मा प्रतिष्ठितः Muṇḍ.2.2.7.
    -2 the body; Ch. Up.
    -पुरम्, -पुरी 1 the city of Brahman (in heaven).
    -2 N. of Benares.
    -पुराणम् N. of one of the eighteen Purāṇas.
    -पुरुषः a minister of Brahman (the five vital airs).
    -प्रलयः the universal destruction at the end of one hundred years of Brahman in which even the Supreme Being is supposed to be swallowed up.
    -प्राप्तिः f. absorp- tion into the Supreme spirit.
    -बलम् the Brahmani- cal power.
    -बन्धुः 1 a contemptuous term for a Brāh- maṇa, an unworthy Brāhmaṇa (cf. Mar. भटुर्गा); वस ब्रह्मचर्यं न वै सोम्यास्मत्कुलीनो$ननूज्य ब्रह्मबन्धुरिव भवतीति Ch. Up.6.1.1; ब्रह्मबन्धुरिति स्माहम् Bhāg.1.81.16; M.4; V.2.
    -2 one who is a Brāhmaṇa only by caste, a nominal Brāhmaṇa.
    -बिन्दुः a drop of saliva sputtered while reciting the Veda.
    -बीजम् 1 the mystic syllable om; मनो यच्छेज्जितश्वासो ब्रह्मबीजमविस्मरन् Bhāg.2.1.17.
    -2 the mulberry tree.
    -ब्रुवः, -ब्रुवाणः one who pretends to be a Brāhmaṇa.
    -भवनम् the abode of Brahman.
    -भागः 1 the mulberry tree.
    -2 the share of the chief priest; अथास्मै ब्रह्मभागं पर्याहरन्ति Śat. Br.
    -भावः absorp- tion into the Supreme Spirit
    -भावनम् imparting religious knowledge; छेत्ता ते हृदयग्रन्थिमौदर्यो ब्रह्मभावनः Bhāg.3.24.4.
    -भिद् a. dividing the one Brahma into many.
    -भुवनम् the world of Brahman; आ ब्रह्म- भुवनाल्लोकाः पुनरावर्तिनो$र्जुन Bg.8.16.
    -भूत a. become one with Brahma, absorbed into the Supreme Spirit; आयुष्मन्तः सर्व एव ब्रह्मभूता हि मे मताः Mb.1.1.14.
    -भूतिः f. twilight.
    -भूमिजा a kind of pepper.
    -भूयम् 1 identity with Brahma, absorption or dissolution into Brahma, final emancipation; स ब्रह्मभूयं गतिमागजाम R.18.28; ब्रह्मभूयाय कल्पते Bg.14.26; Ms.1.98.
    -2 Brahmanahood, the state or rank of a Brāhmaṇa. धृष्टाद्धार्ष्टमभूत् क्षत्र ब्रह्मभूयं गतं क्षितौ Bhāg.9.2.17.
    -भूयस n. absorption into Brahma.
    -मङ्गलदेवता an epithet of Lakshmī.
    -महः a festival in honour of Brāhmaṇas.
    -मित्र a. having Brāhmaṇas for friends.
    -मीमांसा the Vedānta philosophy which inquires into the nature of Brahma or Supreme Spirit.
    -मुहूर्तः a particular hour of the day.
    -मूर्ति a. having the form of Brahman.
    -मूर्धभृत् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -मेखलः the Munja plant.
    -यज्ञः one of the five daily Yajñas or sacrifices (to be performed by a householder), teaching and reciting the Vedas; अध्यापनं ब्रह्मयज्ञः Ms.3.7 (अध्यापनशब्देन अध्य- यनमपि गृह्यते Kull.)
    -योगः cultivation or acquisition of spiritual knowledge.
    -योनि a.
    1 sprung from Brahman; गुरुणा ब्रह्मयोनिना R.1.64. (
    -निः) f.
    1 original source in Brahman.
    -2 the author of the Vedas or of Brahman; किं पुनर्ब्रह्मयोनेर्यस्तव चेतसि वर्तते Ku.6.18. ˚स्थ a. intent on the means of attaining sacred knowledge; ब्राह्मणा ब्रह्मयोनिस्था ये स्वकर्मण्यवस्थिताः Ms.1.74.
    -रत्नम् a valuable present made to a Brāhmaṇa.
    -रन्ध्रम् an aperture in the crown of the head through which the soul is said to escape on its leaving the body; आरोप्य ब्रह्मरन्ध्रेण ब्रह्म नीत्वोत्सृजेत्तनुम् Bhāg.11.15.24.
    -राक्षसः See ब्रह्मग्रह; छिद्रं हि मृगयन्ते स्म विद्वांसो ब्रह्मराक्षसाः Rām. 1.8.17.
    -रवः muttering of prayers.
    -रसः Brahma's savour. ˚आसवः Brahma's nectar.
    -रातः an epithet of Śuka; Bhāg.1.9.8.
    -रात्रः early dawn.
    -रात्रिः an epithet of Yājñavalkya, (wrong for ब्रह्मरातिः)
    -राशिः 1 the whole mass or circle of sacred know- ledge.
    -2 an epithet of Paraśurāma.
    -3 a particular constellation.
    -रीतिः f. a kind of brass.
    -रे(ले)खा -लिखितम्, -लेखः lines written by the creator on the forehead of a man which indicate his destiny, the predestined lot of any man.
    -लोकः the world of Brahman.
    -लौकिक a. inhabiting the ब्रह्मलोक.
    -वक्तृ m. an expounder of the Vedas.
    -वद्यम् knowledge of Brahma.
    -वधः, -वध्या, -हत्या the murder of a Brāh- maṇa.
    -वर्चस् n.,
    -वर्चसम् 1 divine glory or splendour, spiritual pre-eminence or holiness resulting from sacred knowledge; स य एवमेतद्रथन्तरमग्नौ प्रोतं वेद ब्रह्मवर्चस्यन्नादो भवति Ch. Up.2.12.2; (तस्य) हेतुस्त्वद्ब्रह्मवर्चसम् R.1.63; Ms.2.37;4.94.
    -2 the inherent sanctity or power of a Brāhmaṇa; Ś.6.
    -वर्चसिन्, -वर्चस्विन् a. holy or sanctified by spiritual pre-eminence, holy; अपृथग्धीरुपा- सीत ब्रह्मवर्चस्व्यकल्मषः Bhāg.11.17.32. (-m.) an eminent or holy Brāhmaṇa; ब्रह्मवर्चस्विनः पुत्रा जायन्ते शिष्टसंमताः Ms. 3.39.
    -वर्तः see ब्रह्मावर्त.
    -वर्धनम् copper.
    -वाच् f. the sacred text.
    -वादः a discourse on the sacred texts; ब्रह्मवादः सुसंवृत्तः श्रुतयो यत्र शेरते Bhāg.1.87.1.
    -वादिन् m.
    1 one who teaches or expounds the Vedas; U.1; Māl.1.
    -2 a follower of the Vedānta philosophy; तस्याभिषेक आरब्धो ब्राह्मणैर्ब्रह्मवादिभिः Bhāg.4.15.11. (
    -नी) an epithet of Gāyatrī; आयाहि वरदे देवि त्र्यक्षरे ब्रह्मवादिनि Gāyatryāvāhanamantra.
    -वासः the abode of Brāhma- ṇas.
    -विद्, -विद a.
    1 knowing the Supreme Spirit; ब्रह्मविद् ब्रह्मैव भवति. (-m.) a sage, theologian, philosopher.
    -विद्या, -वित्त्वम् knowledge of the Supreme Spirit. ब्रह्मविद्यापरिज्ञानं ब्रह्मप्राप्तिकरं स्थितम् Śuka. Up.3.1.
    -विन्दुः see ब्रह्मबिन्दु.
    -विवर्धनः an epithet of Indra.
    -विहारः a pious conduct, perfect state; Buddh.
    -वीणा a particular Vīṇā.
    -वृक्षः 1 the Palāśa tree.
    -2 the Udumbara tree.
    -वृत्तिः f. livelihood of a Brāhmaṇa; ब्रह्मवृत्त्या हि पूर्णत्वं तया पूर्णत्वमभ्यसेत् Tejobindu Up.1.42.
    -वृन्दम् an assemblage of Brāhmaṇas.
    -वेदः 1 knowledge of the Vedas.
    -2 monotheism, knowledge of Brahma.
    -3 the Veda of the Brāhmaṇas (opp. क्षत्रवेद).
    -4 N. of the Atharvaveda; ब्रह्मवेदस्याथर्वर्णं शुक्रमत एव मन्त्राः प्रादु- र्बभूवुः Praṇava Up.4.
    -वेदिन् a. knowing the Vedas; cf. ब्रह्मविद्.
    -वैवर्तम् N. of one of the eighteen Purāṇas
    -व्रतम् a vow of chastity.
    -शल्यः Acacia Arabica (Mar. बाभळ).
    -शाला 1 the hall of Brahman.
    -2 a place for reciting the Vedas.
    -शासनम् 1 a decree addressed to Brāhmaṇas.
    -2 a command of Brahman.
    -3 the command of a Brāhmaṇa.
    -4 instruction about sacred duty.
    -शिरस्, -शीर्षन् n. N. of a particular missile; अस्त्रं ब्रह्मशिरस्तस्मै ततस्तोषाद्ददौ गुरुः Bm.1.649.
    -श्री N. of a Sāman.
    -संसद् f. an assembly of Brāh- maṇas.
    -संस्थ a. wholly devoted to the sacred know- ledge (ब्रह्म); ब्रह्मसंस्थो$मृतत्वमेति Ch. Up.2.23.1.
    -सती an epithet of the river Sarasvatī.
    -सत्रम् 1 repeating and teaching the Vedas (= ब्रह्मयज्ञ q. v.); ब्रह्मसत्रेण जीवति Ms.4.9; ब्रह्मसत्रे व्यवस्थितः Mb.12.243.4.
    -2 medita- tion of Brahma (ब्रह्मविचार); स्वायंभुव ब्रह्मसत्रं जनलोके$भवत् पुरा Bhāg.1.87.9.
    -3 absorption into the Supreme Spirit.
    -सत्रिन् a. offering the sacrifice of prayer.
    -सदस् n. the residence of Brahman.
    -सभा the hall or court of Brahman.
    -संभव a. sprung or coming from Brahman. (
    -वः) N. of Nārada.
    -सर्पः a kind of snake.
    -सवः distillation of Soma.
    -सायुज्यम् com- plete identification with the Supreme Spirit; cf. ब्रह्मभूय.
    -सार्ष्टिता identification or union or equality with Brahma; Ms.4.232.
    -सावर्णिः N. of the tenth Manu; दशमो ब्रह्मसावर्णिरुपश्लोकसुतो महान् Bhāg.8.13.21.
    -सुतः 1 N. of Nārada, Marīchi &c.
    -2 a kind of Ketu.
    -सुवर्चला f.
    1 N. of a medicinal plant (ब्राह्मी ?).
    -2 an infusion (क्वथितमुदक); पिबेद् ब्रह्मसुवर्चलाम् Ms.11.159.
    -सूः 1 N. of Aniruddha.
    -2 N. of the god of love.
    -सूत्रम् 1 the sacred thread worn by the Brāhmaṇas or the twice-born (द्विज) over the shoulder; Bhāg. 1.39.51.
    -2 the aphorisms of the Vedānta philosophy by Bādarāyaṇa; ब्रह्मसूत्रपदैश्चैव हेतुमद्भिर्विनिश्चितैः Bg.13.4.
    -सूत्रिन् a. invested with the sacred thread.
    -सृज् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -स्तम्बः the world, universe; ब्रह्मस्तम्बनिकुञ्जपुञ्जितघनज्याघोषघोरं धनुः Mv.3.48.
    -स्तेयम् acquiring holy knowledge by unlawful means; स ब्रह्मस्तेयसंयुक्तो नरकं प्रतिपद्यते Ms.2.116.
    -स्थली a place for learning the Veda (पाठशाला);...... ब्रह्मस्थलीषु च । सरी- सृपाणि दृश्यन्ते... Rām.6.1.16.
    -स्थानः the mulberry tree.
    -स्वम् the property or possessions of a Brāhmaṇa; परस्य योषितं हृत्वा ब्रह्मस्वमपहृत्य च । अरण्ये निर्जले देशे भवति ब्रह्मराक्षसः ॥ Y.3.212. ˚हारिन् a. stealing a Brāhmaṇa's property.
    -स्वरूप a. of the nature of the Supreme Spirit.
    -हत्या, -वधः Brahmanicide, killing a Brāh- maṇa; ब्रह्महत्यां वा एते घ्नन्ति Trisuparṇa. हन् a. murderer of a Brāhmaṇa; ब्रह्महा द्वादश समाः कुटीं कृत्वा वने वसेत् Ms.11.72.
    -हुतम् one of the five daily Yajñas or sacrifices, which consists in offering the rites of hospitality to guests; cf. Ms.3.74.
    -हृदयः, -यम् N. of a star (Capella).

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > ब्रह्मन् _brahman

  • 11 w

    w, we praep. 1. (wskazując na miejsce) in (czymś sth); (o instytucji) at (czymś sth)
    - w kuchni/łazience in the kitchen/bathroom
    - w domu/szkole/pracy at home/school/work
    - w Warszawie/we Wrocławiu in Warsaw/Wrocław
    - w Polsce/we Włoszech in Poland/Italy
    - w górach/lesie in the mountains/forest
    - w powietrzu/wodzie in the air/water
    - w szklance/pudełku in a glass/box
    - w prasie in the press
    - w telewizji/radiu on television/on the radio
    - w wyobraźni in one’s imagination
    - otwór w desce a hole in a board
    - trzymała coś w dłoni she was holding something in her hand
    - siedział w fotelu he was sitting in an armchair
    - trzymał ręce w kieszeniach he had his hands in his pockets
    - byłem wczoraj w kinie/teatrze I went to the cinema/theatre yesterday
    - uczyła się w szkole muzycznej she was studying at a music school
    - nagle stanął w drzwiach suddenly he appeared in the doorway
    - służyć w armii to be in the army
    - grać w orkiestrze to play with a. in an orchestra
    - działać w związkach zawodowych to be a trade union activist
    - to najcenniejszy obraz w całej kolekcji this is the most valuable picture in the entire collection
    - śledzie w oleju/sosie pomidorowym herring in oil/tomato sauce
    2. (kierunek) (in)to (coś sth)
    - w stronę czegoś in the direction of sth, towards sth
    - nie wchodź w kałuże don’t walk in the puddles
    - samochód wjechał w tłum the car ploughed into the crowd
    - pies chwycił kość w zęby the dog took the bone in its teeth
    - wziął ją w ramiona he took her in his arms
    - wpięła kokardę we włosy she pinned a ribbon in her hair
    - pojechali w góry they’ve gone to the mountains
    - spojrzeć w lewo/prawo to look (to one’s) left/right
    - spojrzeć w górę/dół to look up(wards)/down(wards)
    - wypłynąć w morze to set sail
    3. (wskazując na kontakt) on
    - uderzenie w nos/szczękę a blow on the nose/jaw
    - pocałować kogoś w usta/policzek to kiss sb on the lips/cheek
    - uderzyć się w głowę/kolano (o coś) to hit one’s head/knee (on sth)
    - walić w drzwi to bang on the door
    - oparzyć się w rękę to burn one’s hand
    - ugryźć się w język to bite one’s tongue także przen.
    - pies ugryzł go w nogę a dog bit his leg a. bit him in the leg
    - podrap mnie w plecy scratch my back
    - piorun uderzył w drzewo the lightning struck a tree
    4. (wskazując na rodzaj ubrania, opakowania) in
    - w spódnicy/sandałach/okularach in a skirt/in sandals/in glasses
    - mężczyzna w czarnym kapeluszu a man in a. wearing a black hat
    - (on) zawsze chodzi w dżinsach he always wears jeans
    - ubrał się w ciemny garnitur he put on a dark suit
    - kobieta w bieli a woman (dressed) in white
    - bukiet róż w celofanie a bunch of roses wrapped in cellophane
    - proszę mi to zapakować w papier/w pudełko please wrap it up in paper/pack it in a box (for me)
    5. (wskazując na dziedzinę) in
    - nowe kierunki w sztuce new directions in art
    - symbole stosowane w matematyce symbols used in mathematics
    - co nowego w polityce? what’s new in politics?
    6. (wskazując na stan) in
    - żyć w skrajnej nędzy to live in extreme poverty
    - być w wyśmienitym nastroju to be in the best of moods
    - być w opłakanym stanie to be in a lamentable state
    - wpakować kogoś w kłopoty to get sb into trouble
    - wprawić kogoś w zdumienie/zakłopotanie to astonish/embarrass sb
    - wpaść w furię to fly into a passion
    7. (wskazując na okoliczności) in
    - w milczeniu in silence
    - w samotności in solitude
    - w całym zamieszaniu in all the confusion
    - w wielkim skupieniu with great concentration
    - w tych warunkach in these conditions
    - w trzydziestostopniowym upale in the 30-degree heatwave
    - nie wychodzę z domu w taki mróz/upał I don’t go out when it’s that cold/hot
    8. (w określeniach czasu) in
    - w XX wieku/w 1873 roku in the 20th century/in 1873
    - w latach dwudziestych XIX wieku in the eighteen twenties
    - w zimie/lecie in (the) winter/summer
    - w maju/we wrześniu in May/September
    - w poniedziałek/we wtorek on Monday/Tuesday
    - w ubiegły/przyszły czwartek last/next Thursday
    - w ubiegłym/przyszłym roku last/next year
    - w następnym roku in the following year
    - we dnie i w nocy day and night
    - w ten dzień a. w tym dniu (on) that day
    - w dniu 11 listopada on the 11th of November
    - w starożytności/średniowieczu in ancient times a. antiquity/the Middle Ages
    - w dawnych czasach in the old days
    - w przeszłości/przyszłości in the past/the future
    - w młodości in sb’s youth
    - w rok/miesiąc/tydzień później a year/month/week later
    - w dwie godziny/w trzy miesiące/w rok in two hours/three months/a year
    9 (podczas) in, during
    - zginął w powstaniu he was killed during/in the uprising
    - w rozmowie ze mną wspomniał, że… in conversation with me he mentioned that…
    - w podróży (on) najczęściej śpi he usually sleeps when travelling
    10 (wskazując na formę) in
    - komedia w trzech aktach a comedy in three acts
    - mapa w skali 1:100000 a map to a scale of 1:100,000
    - stoły ustawione w podkowę tables arranged in a horseshoe
    - otrzymać honorarium w gotówce to be paid in cash
    - mówili w jakimś obcym języku they were speaking in a foreign language
    - cukier w kostkach cube sugar, sugar cubes
    - herbata w granulkach granulated tea
    - mleko w proszku powdered milk
    - mydło w płynie liquid soap
    - spodnie w jasnym kolorze light-coloured trousers
    - sukienki w kilku kolorach dresses in several colours
    - rzeźba w marmurze a sculpture in marble
    - 10 tysięcy złotych w banknotach dwudziestozłotowych ten thousand zlotys in twenty-zloty notes
    11 (wzór) sukienka w grochy a polka-dot dress
    - spódnica w kwiaty a flower-patterned skirt
    - zasłony w paski striped curtains
    - papier w kratkę squared paper
    - rękawy haftowane w srebrne gwiazdy sleeves embroidered with silver stars
    12 (wskazując na przemianę) into
    - pokroić coś w kostkę/plastry to cut sth into cubes/slices, to cube/slice sth
    - czarownica przemieniła królewicza w żabę the witch turned the prince into a frog
    - mżawka przeszła w ulewę the drizzle turned into a downpour
    13 (wskazując na ilość) in
    - podanie w dwóch/trzech egzemplarzach an application in duplicate/triplicate
    - spali we trójkę w jednym łóżku the three of them slept in one bed
    - poszliśmy w piątkę do kina the five of us went to the cinema
    - romantyczna podróż we dwoje a romantic journey for two
    14 (jeśli chodzi o) cierpki w smaku bitter in taste
    - szorstki w dotyku rough to the touch
    - on jest miły/niemiły w obejściu he’s pleasant/unpleasant
    - za ciasny/luźny w pasie too tight/loose round the waist
    - ciasny w ramionach tight across the shoulders
    - szeroki w ramionach/biodrach broad-shouldered/broad-hipped
    - urządzenie proste w obsłudze an easy-to-use appliance
    - był zawsze rozsądny w planowaniu wydatków he was always prudent in planning his expenditure
    15 (wskazując na powód) in
    - w uznaniu jego zasług in recognition of his services
    - w obawie o jej/własne bezpieczeństwo in fear of a. fearing for her/one’s own safety
    - w poszukiwaniu lepszego życia in one’s search for a better life
    - w nadziei, że… in the hope that…
    16 (wskazując na cel) pójść w odwiedziny do kogoś to go to visit a. see sb
    - ruszyć w pogoń za kimś to set off in pursuit of sb
    - puścić się w tany to start dancing
    17 (wskazując na cechę) in
    - wahanie w jego/jej głosie hesitation in his/her voice
    - było coś dostojnego w jej zachowaniu there was something dignified in her manner
    * * *
    1. nt
    inv ( litera) W, w

    W jak Wacław — ≈W for William

    2. abbr
    ( =wat) W. ( watt)
    * * *
    I.
    w
    n.
    indecl. ( litera) W, w; W jak Wacław W is for Whiskey; W as in Whiskey.
    II.
    w
    prep.
    + Loc.
    1. (miejsce, lokalizacja) in, at, inside; w domu at home; w pracy at work; w kinie at the movie theater; Br. at the cinema; w górach in the mountains; w lesie in the forest; w szklance in a glass; w samochodzie in the car; w pociągu on the train; w areszcie in detention; w biurze at the office; w odległości stu metrów 100 meters away, within 100 meters; w prasie in the papers; w radiu on the radio; w telewizji on TV; w wojsku in the army; w sądzie in court; w pamięci in memory; w wyobraźni in one's imagination; w sercu in one's heart; w duchu in one's soul; zimno mi w nogi my feet are cold.
    2. ( okoliczności) in; w bójce in fight; w płomieniach in flames; w trzech tomach in three volumes; w dwóch egzemplarzach in two copies; w skrócie in short; w poszukiwaniu prawdy in search for the truth; w części (odnowiony) partly (redecorated).
    3. ( stan) in; w chorobie in illness; w gorączce in fever; w miłości in love; w milczeniu in silence; w nędzy in poverty; w panice in panic; w budowie under construction; w blasku sławy in a blaze of glory; być w dobrym humorze be in a good mood; być w błędzie be mistaken; coś jest w modzie sth is in vogue l. fashion.
    4. ( ograniczenie) in; w pasie round the waist; szorstki w dotyku rough to the touch; szczupła w biodrach slim-hipped; miły w kontaktach osobistych pleasant in personal relations.
    5. ( ubiór lub jego część) in; w futrze in a fur coat; w okularach wearing glasses; w kapeluszu with a hat on, in a hat; kobieta w bieli a woman in white.
    6. (to, w czym się coś trzyma) in; w ręce in hand; w pułapce in a trap; trzymać kogoś w ramionach hold sb in one's arms.
    7. ( postać) in; mydło w płynie liquid soap; cukier w kostkach cube sugar; rzeźba w marmurze sculpture in marble; milion dolarów w złocie a million dollars in gold; 1000 zł w banknotach stuzłotowych a thousand zlotys in one hundred zloty bills; Br. a thousand zlotys in one hundred zloty notes.
    8. ( typ działania) in; dostać (coś) w prezencie get l. receive (sth) as a present; płacić w gotówce/ratach pay in cash/in installments.
    9. + Acc. ( kierunek) in, to; w lewo/prawo to the left/right; w dół/górę downwards/upwards; patrzeć w niebo look up in the sky; pojechać w góry go to the mountains; wyjść w morze set sail.
    10. (kształt, właściwość) in; w kratkę checked, checkered, Br. chequered; w kwiaty flowered, millefleurs; w paski striped; w parach in pairs; pokroić (coś) w kostkę cut (sth) into cubes, cube (sth).
    11. ( przedmiot działania) on, in; bić w dzwony ring the bells; celować w serce aim at the heart; inwestować w swoją przyszłość invest in one's future; uderzyć się w palec ( u nogi) stub one's toe; ( u ręki) hit one's finger; uderzyć się w głowę get a bang on the head; walić w drzwi bang on the door; wdać się w bójkę get into a fight; wierzyć w Boga believe in God; wprawić w zdumienie astonish, amaze; puknij się w czoło are you out of senses?
    12. + Acc. ( całość) in; w całości in full; w pełni to the full; w całym słowa tego znaczeniu par excellence; układać fakty w logiczną całość arrange facts logically.
    13. + Acc. ( wyposażenie) with; uzbrojony w karabin armed with a gun; wyposażony w narzędzia equipped with tools; obfitować w ryby swarm l. teem with fish; zaopatrzyć w żywność provide with food.
    14. + Acc. ( sposób) in; rozumieć w lot be quick on the uptake; śmiać się w głos laugh up l. in one's sleeve; wyciąć w pień kill every last one; żyć w nędzy live in poverty.
    15. + Acc. ( cel) in; grać w karty play cards; pójść (do kogoś) w odwiedziny pay (sb) a visit; zapaść w sen lapse into sleep, fall asleep.
    16. + Acc. ( skutek) into; obrócić się w popiół turn to dust; rozpaść się w kawałki fall into pieces; śpiew przerodził się w krzyk the singing turned into a scream.
    17. + Acc. ( odczucia) in; być w dobrym humorze be in a good mood; leżeć w bólach be lying in pains.
    18. + Acc. l. Loc. ( czas) at, on, in; we wtorek on Tuesday; w dzień during the day, by day; w południe at noon; w nocy at night; w maju in May; w roku 1995 in 1995; w lecie in the summer; w porze lunchu at lunchtime; w czasie urlopu during the holiday; w dniu ślubu on the wedding day; w wieczór wigilijny on Christmas Eve; w rok po spotkaniu a year after the meeting; w godzinę po twoim wyjściu an hour after you left; w ostatniej chwili at the last minute l. moment, at the eleventh hour; w ostatnich latach in recent years; w biały dzień in broad daylight; w młodości in one's youth; dzień w dzień day after day.

    The New English-Polish, Polish-English Kościuszko foundation dictionary > w

  • 12 esperar

    v.
    1 to wait (for).
    te esperaremos en el aeropuerto we'll meet you at the airport, we'll be waiting for you at the airport
    esperar a que alguien haga algo to wait for somebody to do something
    espera, que ya voy wait a minute, I'm coming
    Elsa espera pacientemente Elsa waits patiently.
    espero poder ayudar I hope I can be of some help
    esperar que to hope that
    espero que sí/no I hope so/not
    esperar hacer algo to hope to do something
    Esperamos que suceda lo mejor We hope for the best.
    no esperábamos esta reacción we didn't expect this reaction
    esperar algo de alguien to expect something from somebody, to hope for something from somebody
    como era de esperar as was to be expected
    Elsa espera un milagro Elsa expects a miracle.
    4 to await, to be in store for (ser inevitable).
    le esperan dificultades many difficulties await him
    ¡me espera una buena en casa! (informal) I'm in for it when I get home!
    5 to wait for, to await, to wait.
    Elsa espera el tren Elsa waits for the train.
    6 to expect to, to look forward to, to hope to, to be expecting to.
    Ellos esperan llegar pronto They hope to arrive soon.
    7 to await for, to expect, to watch for.
    Ellos esperan la noticia They await for the news.
    Me espera una sorpresa A surprise awaits for me.
    * * *
    1 (tener esperanza) to hope for, expect
    2 (contar, creer) to expect
    3 (aguardar) to wait for, await
    4 (desear) to hope
    5 (ser inevitable) to await, be ahead
    6 figurado (bebé) to expect
    1 to wait
    1 (aguardar) to wait
    2 (creer, contar) to expect
    3 (desear) to hope
    \
    en espera de noticias tuyas we hope to hear from you soon
    ¡espérate sentado! don't hold your breath!, you'll be waiting till the cows come home!
    espero que no I hope not
    espero que sí I hope so
    hacer esperar a alguien to keep somebody waiting
    hacerse esperar to keep people waiting
    quien espera desespera a watched pot never boils
    * * *
    verb
    1) to wait for, await
    3) hope
    •
    * * *
    1. VT
    1) (=aguardar) [+ tren, persona] to wait for

    esperaban noticias de los rehenes — they were waiting for o awaiting news of the hostages

    ¡la que te espera cuando llegues a casa! — you're (in) for it when you get home!

    un lío de aquí te espero — * a tremendous row *

    2) (=desear) to hope

    - ya nos pagará -espero que sea así — "he'll pay us, you'll see" - "I hope you're right o I hope so"

    -¿vienen a la fiesta? -espero que sí — "are they coming to the party?" - "I hope so"

    -¿crees que se enfadará? -espero que no — "do you think she will be angry?" - "I hope not"

    3) (=contar con) to expect

    ¿esperas visita? — are you expecting someone?

    ¿acaso esperas que pague yo? — you're not expecting me to pay, are you?

    ¿qué esperas, que encima te lo agradezca? — don't expect me to thank you for it as well

    ¿qué puedes esperar de él, después de cómo se ha comportado? — what do you expect from him, after the way he has behaved?

    • era de esperar — it was to be expected

    • no esperaba menos de ti — I expected nothing o no less of you

    4) [+ bebé]
    2. VI
    1) (=aguardar) to wait

    ¡espera un momento, este no es mi libro! — hold on o wait a minute, this isn't my book!

    espera en la puerta, ahora mismo voy — wait at the door, I'm just coming

    esperar a o hasta que algn haga algo — to wait for sb to do sth

    • hacer esperar a algn — keep sb waiting

    2)

    • esperar en algn — to put one's hopes o trust in sb

    3.
    See:
    ESPERAR Esperar tiene en inglés varias traducciones, entre las que se encuentran wait (for), await, hope y expect. ► Se traduce por wait ( for ) cuando esperar se refiere al hecho de aguardar la llegada de alguien o de un suceso: Hice el examen hace dos meses y todavía estoy esperando los resultados I took the exam two months ago and I'm still waiting for the results La esperó media hora y después se fue a casa He waited half an hour for her and then went home ► El verbo await es un verbo de uso similar a wait for, aunque no requiere el uso de la preposición y no es muy corriente en inglés moderno: Esperaban ansiosamente la llegada del Rey They eagerly awaited the arrival of the King ► Se traduce por hope cuando deseamos que algo suceda, pero no estamos seguros de si ocurrirá o no: Espero que no se enfade mucho conmigo I hope (that) she won't be very annoyed with me Después de terminar la carrera espero conseguir un buen trabajo I hope to get a good job when I finish university ► Traducimos esperar por expect cuando estamos muy seguros de que algo va a suceder o cuando hay una razón lógica para que algo suceda: Espero aprobar porque el examen me salió muy bien I expect to pass o I expect I'll pass because the exam went very well Ha resultado mejor de lo que esperábamos It was better than we expected Está esperando un niño She's expecting (a baby) Para otros usos y ejemplos ver la entrada
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo
    1)
    a) <autobús/persona/acontecimiento> to wait for

    ¿qué estás esperando para decírselo? — tell him! what are you waiting for?

    b) ( recibir) to meet
    c) sorpresa to await

    ya verás la que te espera en casa! — (fam) you'll catch it o you'll be for it when you get home! (colloq)

    2)
    a) (contar con, prever) to expect

    esperar que + subj: ¿esperabas que te felicitara? did you expect me to congratulate you?; era de esperar que el proyecto fracasara the project was bound to fail; no esperes que cambie de idea don't expect me to change my mind; esperar algo de alguien/algo to expect something of somebody/something; esperaba otra cosa de ti I expected more of you; de ella no puedes esperar ayuda — don't expect her to help

    b) <niño/bebé> to be expecting
    3) ( con esperanza) to hope

    eso espero or espero que sí — I hope so

    esperar + inf — to hope to + inf

    esperar que + subj: espero que no llueva/que te guste I hope it doesn't rain/you like it; espero que tengas suerte I wish you luck; esperemos que no sea nada grave — let's hope it's nothing serious

    2.
    a) ( aguardar) to wait

    espera, que bajo contigo — wait a minute o (colloq) hold on, I'll come down with you

    esperar a + inf: espera a estar seguro wait until you're sure; esperar (a) que + subj: esperaron (a) que él se fuera para entrar they waited for him to go before they went in; espera (a) que te llamen wait until they call you; esperar sentado (fam): si piensa que lo voy a llamar puede esperar sentado if he thinks I'm going to call him he's got another think coming (colloq); ¿que él cambie de idea? mejor espera sentada him change his mind? some hope!; quien espera desespera — waiting's the worst part

    ¿para cuándo espera? — when's the baby due?

    3.
    esperarse v pron
    1) (fam) ( aguardar) to hang on (colloq), to hold on (colloq)

    espérate ¿no ves que estoy ocupada? — wait a minute! can't you see I'm busy?

    2) (fam) ( prever) to expect
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo
    1)
    a) <autobús/persona/acontecimiento> to wait for

    ¿qué estás esperando para decírselo? — tell him! what are you waiting for?

    b) ( recibir) to meet
    c) sorpresa to await

    ya verás la que te espera en casa! — (fam) you'll catch it o you'll be for it when you get home! (colloq)

    2)
    a) (contar con, prever) to expect

    esperar que + subj: ¿esperabas que te felicitara? did you expect me to congratulate you?; era de esperar que el proyecto fracasara the project was bound to fail; no esperes que cambie de idea don't expect me to change my mind; esperar algo de alguien/algo to expect something of somebody/something; esperaba otra cosa de ti I expected more of you; de ella no puedes esperar ayuda — don't expect her to help

    b) <niño/bebé> to be expecting
    3) ( con esperanza) to hope

    eso espero or espero que sí — I hope so

    esperar + inf — to hope to + inf

    esperar que + subj: espero que no llueva/que te guste I hope it doesn't rain/you like it; espero que tengas suerte I wish you luck; esperemos que no sea nada grave — let's hope it's nothing serious

    2.
    a) ( aguardar) to wait

    espera, que bajo contigo — wait a minute o (colloq) hold on, I'll come down with you

    esperar a + inf: espera a estar seguro wait until you're sure; esperar (a) que + subj: esperaron (a) que él se fuera para entrar they waited for him to go before they went in; espera (a) que te llamen wait until they call you; esperar sentado (fam): si piensa que lo voy a llamar puede esperar sentado if he thinks I'm going to call him he's got another think coming (colloq); ¿que él cambie de idea? mejor espera sentada him change his mind? some hope!; quien espera desespera — waiting's the worst part

    ¿para cuándo espera? — when's the baby due?

    3.
    esperarse v pron
    1) (fam) ( aguardar) to hang on (colloq), to hold on (colloq)

    espérate ¿no ves que estoy ocupada? — wait a minute! can't you see I'm busy?

    2) (fam) ( prever) to expect
    * * *
    esperar1
    1 = await, wait, wait for, hang on, be in store, tarry.

    Ex: Comment published so far is favourable, but the code still awaits widespread adoption.

    Ex: Otherwise documents will have to wait in cataloguing departments until the record does become available.
    Ex: Please accept this from the person who was probably the biggest sceptic in the State of Ohio at the beginning -- if we had waited for this from the start, I think we never would have started.
    Ex: ' Hang on a sec, okay?' the senior assistant librarian in charge of serials said as she put the phone down.
    Ex: A worse fate is in store for those whose integrated library sustem vendor goes out of business or is bought by another vendor.
    Ex: And arming himself with patience and piety he tarried awhile until the hubbub was stilled.
    * de aquí te espero = tremendous, humongous [humungous], massive, enormous, gianormous.
    * esperamos su repuesta = look forward to + hearing from you.
    * esperar con impaciencia = kick + Posesivo + heels.
    * esperar el turno de Uno = wait + Posesivo + turn.
    * esperar en el futuro = be in store for + Nombre + in the future, future + have in store.
    * esperar entre bastidores = wait in + the wings, lurk in + the wings.
    * esperar impacientemente = kick + Posesivo + heels.
    * esperar sin nada que hacer = kick + Posesivo + heels.
    * esperar su momento = wait in + the wings, stand in + the wings, lurk in + the wings.
    * esperar su oportunidad = wait in + the wings, stand in + the wings, lurk in + the wings.
    * esperar una sorpresa desagradable = rude awakening + be in store, be in for a rude awakening.
    * hacer esperar = cool + Posesivo + heels.
    * hacer + Pronombre + esperar = keep + Pronombre + waiting.
    * lo que espera a = what is on store for.
    * lo que nos espera = things to come.
    * protesta + no hacerse esperar = cry + ring out.
    * ser lo que nos espera = be the shape of things to come.

    esperar2
    2 = call on/upon, expect, hope, count on, look to, bank on.

    Ex: The difference is only that an indexer is not usually called upon to appreciate the subtleties of the subject to the same extent as an abstractor.

    Ex: In a journal most formal items including articles, essays, discussions and reviews can be expected to be accompanied by an abstract.
    Ex: It is hoped that a new ISDS manual and guidelines for bibliographic description will be published in 1986.
    Ex: Bookstores can no longer count on customers buying books if there is a more attractive entertainment option.
    Ex: Those with more faith than I look to gigantic electronic archives maintained by governments and private companies that will ensure the indefinite survival of the electronic records of humankind.
    Ex: Don't bank on it, there can be bright sunshine, hailstones, drizzle, pouring rain and snowflurries in any given hour of the day.
    * como cabe esperar = unsurprisingly, as one might expect, as expected.
    * como cabía esperar = as expected.
    * como cabría esperar = as might be expected, as one might expect.
    * como era de esperar = as expected.
    * como es de esperar = predictably, not surprisingly, as expected.
    * cuando menos te lo esperes = on any given Sunday.
    * decir + esperar = express + hope.
    * es de esperar = hopefully.
    * esperamos sus noticias = look forward to + hearing from you.
    * esperando que = in hopeful expectation that.
    * esperar con ansiedad = hope for, hold + Posesivo + breath.
    * esperar con ansiedad (+ Infinitivo) = look forward to (+ Gerundio).
    * esperar con interés (+ Infinitivo), = look forward to (+ Gerundio).
    * esperar impacientemente (+ Infinitivo) = look forward to (+ Gerundio).
    * esperar lo imposible = shoot (for) + the moon, cry for + the moon, ask for + the moon, reach for + the moon.
    * esperar lo peor = expect + the worst.
    * esperarse = hold + Posesivo + horses.
    * esperarse Algo = come as + no surprise.
    * esperar una (gran) sorpresa = be in for a (big) surprise.
    * llegar a esperar = come to + expect.
    * mucha gente + esperar que = be widely expected.
    * que espera demasiado = over expectant.
    * salir de donde menos Uno se lo espera = come out of + the woodwork.
    * sin esperarlo = out of the blue, like a bolt out of the blue, like a bolt from the blue.

    * * *
    esperar [A1 ]
    vt
    A
    1 ‹autobús/persona/acontecimiento› to wait for
    esperaba el tren/a un amigo he was waiting for the train/a friend
    podrías haber esperado un momento más oportuno you could have waited for a better moment
    espérame, ya voy wait for me, I'm just coming
    la esperé dos horas/en el bar I waited for her for two hours/in the bar
    esperaban con impaciencia la llegada de sus amigos they were really looking forward to their friends coming, they couldn't wait for o they were dying for their friends to arrive ( colloq)
    le encanta hacerse esperar he loves to keep people waiting
    esperar algo/a algn PARA + INF:
    ¿qué estás esperando para decírselo? tell him! what are you waiting for?
    no me esperes para cenar eat without me o don't wait for me to eat
    2 (recibir) to meet
    la fuimos a esperar al aeropuerto we went to meet her at the airport
    ¿dónde van a esperar el Año Nuevo? where will you be seeing the New Year in?
    3 «sorpresa» to await
    la reacción del gobierno no se hizo esperar the government was swift to react
    como no salgamos temprano ya sabes lo que nos espera a la salida de Madrid if we don't leave early, you know what problems we'll have o you know what it'll be like trying to leave Madrid
    le espera un futuro difícil he has a difficult future ahead of him
    ¡ya verás la que te espera en casa! ( fam); you'll catch it o you'll be for it when you get home! ( colloq)
    B
    1 (contar con, prever) to expect
    tal como esperábamos just as we expected
    cuando uno menos lo espera when you least expect it
    ven a cenar, te espero alrededor de las nueve come to dinner, I'll expect you around nine
    estoy esperando una llamada de Nueva York I'm expecting a call from New York
    esperan un lleno completo they expect a full house
    tuvo mayor aceptación de lo que se esperaba it proved to be more popular than had been expected
    esperar QUE + SUBJ:
    se espera que más de un millón de personas visite la exposición over a million people are expected to visit the exhibition
    ¿qué esperabas, que te felicitara? what did you expect me to do? congratulate you?
    era de esperar que el proyecto fracasara the project was bound to fail, it was only to be expected that the project would fail
    no esperes que cambie de idea don't expect me to change my mind
    esperar algo DE algn/algo to expect sth OF sb/sth
    esperaba otra cosa de ti I expected more of you
    no hay que esperar mucho de las conversaciones we shouldn't expect too much of the talks
    de ella no puedes esperar ayuda don't expect her to help, you can't expect to get any help from her
    2 ‹niño/bebé› to be expecting
    esperan el primer hijo para mayo they're expecting their first child in May
    está esperando familia she's expecting
    C (con esperanza) to hope
    ¿te vienen a recoger? — eso espero are they coming to collect you? — I hope so
    ¿quedarán entradas? — espero que sí will there be any tickets left? — I hope so
    ¿habrá perdido el tren? — espero que no do you think he's missed the train? — I hope not
    esperar + INF:
    espero poder llegar a la cumbre esta vez I hope to be able to reach the summit this time
    espero no haberme olvidado de nada I hope I haven't forgotten anything
    esperar QUE + SUBJ:
    espero que no llueva/que haga buen tiempo I hope it doesn't rain/the weather's nice
    espero que tengas suerte I wish you luck
    espero que no me haya mentido I hope he hasn't lied to me
    esperemos que no sea nada grave let's hope it's nothing serious
    ¡y yo que esperaba que estuviera todo listo! and there was I hoping that everything would be ready!
    ■ esperar
    vi
    A
    1 (aguardar) to wait
    lo siento, no podemos esperar más I'm sorry, we can't wait any longer
    mientras esperaba corregí los exámenes I corrected the tests while I was waiting
    espera, que bajo contigo wait a minute o ( colloq) hold on, I'll come down with you
    espere un momento, por favor wait a moment, please
    espera un momento ¿tú qué haces aquí? just a moment, what are you doing here?
    vamos, que el tren no espera come on, the train won't wait for us
    esperar A + INF:
    espera a estar seguro antes de hablar con ella wait until you're sure before you talk to her
    mejor espero a tener un poco más de dinero ahorrado I'd better wait until I've saved a bit more money
    esperar ( A) QUE + SUBJ:
    el profesor esperó (a) que hubiera silencio the teacher waited for them to be quiet
    tiene que esperar (a) que lo llamen you have to wait for them to call you o until they call you
    esperaron (a) que él se fuera para entrar they waited for him to go before they went in
    esperar sentado ( fam): si piensa que lo voy a llamar puede esperar sentado if he thinks I'm going to call him he's got another think coming ( colloq)
    ¿que él cambie de idea? mejor espera sentada him change his mind? some hope! o don't hold your breath! o we could be waiting till the cows come home! ( colloq)
    quien espera desespera waiting's the worst part, the waiting gets you down
    2
    «embarazada»: no sabía que estaba esperando I didn't know she was expecting
    ¿para cuándo espera? when's the baby due?
    quedar esperando ( Chi); to get pregnant
    A ( fam) (aguardar) to hang on ( colloq), to hold on ( colloq)
    espérate ¿no ves que estoy ocupada? wait a minute o hang on o hold on! can't you see I'm busy?
    B ( fam) (prever) to expect
    ¿qué te esperabas por ese precio? what did you expect for that price?
    no me esperaba esa reacción I hadn't expected her to react like that
    ¿quién se iba a esperar que saliera elegido él? who would have thought he would be elected?
    * * *

     

    esperar ( conjugate esperar) verbo transitivo
    1
    a) ‹autobús/persona/acontecimiento› to wait for;

    ◊ ¿qué estás esperando para decírselo? tell him! what are you waiting for?





    2
    a) (contar con, prever) to expect;


    cuando uno menos lo espera when you least expect it;
    te espero alrededor de las nueve I'll expect you around nine;
    ¿esperabas que te felicitara? did you expect me to congratulate you?;
    era de esperar que el proyecto fracasara the project was bound to fail
    b) ‹niño/bebé› to be expecting

    3 ( con esperanza) to hope;
    eso espero or espero que sí I hope so;

    esperar hacer algo to hope to do sth;
    espero que no llueva I hope it doesn't rain;
    esperemos que no sea nada grave let's hope it's nothing serious
    verbo intransitivo


    espera a estar seguro wait until you're sure;
    esperaron (a) que él se fuera para entrar they waited for him to go before they went in
    b) [ embarazada]:


    esperarse verbo pronominal
    1 (fam) ( aguardar) to hang on (colloq), to hold on (colloq)
    2 (fam) ( prever) to expect;
    ◊ ¡quién se lo iba a esperar! who would have thought it!

    esperar
    I verbo transitivo
    1 (aguardar) to wait for: espera un momento, ¿seguro que hablas del mismo Pedro?, wait a minute, are you sure you're talking about the same Peter?
    2 (tener esperanza) to hope: espero que todo salga bien, I hope everything turns out well ➣ Ver nota en hope 3 (desear, suponer) to expect
    4 fig (un hijo) to expect ➣ Ver nota en expect
    II verbo intransitivo to wait: no puedo esperar más, I can't wait any longer
    ♦ Locuciones: familiar de aquí te espero, incredible, massive: afuera hay un follón de aquí te espero, there's an incredible mess outside
    esperar sentado, to have a long wait in store: si creéis que voy a participar en esa locura podéis esperar sentados, if you think that I'm going to have any part of that madness, you'll have to wait a long time
    Esperar tiene tres significados básicos, que corresponden a tres verbos ingleses:
    Aguardar, en sentido general, se traduce por to wait: Llevo media hora esperándote, I've been waiting for you for half an hour.
    Tener esperanza, desear, se traduce por to hope: Espero que vengas mañana. I hope you will come tomorrow. Espero que sí. I hope so.
    Suponer, esperar algo sabiendo que es muy probable que ocurra, se traduce por to expect: Espero la visita de un amigo (sabemos que va a venir). I'm expecting a friend to call.
    ' esperar' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    acecho
    - aguardar
    - amabilidad
    - cruzarse
    - ser
    - esperanza
    - pelaje
    - pendiente
    - prometerse
    - satisfacción
    - como
    - esperado
    - exigir
    - favor
    - hacer
    - mucho
    - preferir
    English:
    aim
    - anticipate
    - await
    - bargain for
    - bargain on
    - daydream
    - eruption
    - expect
    - hang about
    - hang around
    - hang on
    - hold off
    - hold on
    - hope
    - magic wand
    - sit up
    - to
    - trust
    - wait
    - wait about
    - wait around
    - wind
    - would
    - bear
    - bide
    - count
    - dark
    - delay
    - duly
    - else
    - hang
    - hold
    - mind
    - unprepared
    - unrealistic
    * * *
    ♦ vt
    1. [aguardar] to wait for;
    esperar el autobús to wait for the bus;
    te esperaremos en el aeropuerto we'll meet you at the airport, we'll be waiting for you at the airport;
    espéranos un minuto wait for us a minute;
    ¡espérame, que voy contigo! wait for me, I'm coming with you!;
    ¿a qué estás esperando? what are you waiting for?;
    esperar a que alguien haga algo to wait for sb to do sth;
    esperaré a que vuelva I'll wait till she gets back
    2. [tener esperanza de]
    todos esperamos la victoria we all hope for victory;
    esperamos salir al campo el domingo we are hoping to go on a trip to the countryside on Sunday;
    espero poder ayudar I hope I can be of some help;
    esperar que… to hope that…;
    espero que sí/no I hope so/not;
    espero que no te hayas ofendido I hope you didn't take offence;
    esperamos que no sea nada let's hope it's nothing serious;
    ser de esperar: es de esperar que no ocurra ninguna desgracia let's hope nothing terrible happens;
    era de esperar que ocurriría esto you could have predicted this would happen;
    como era de esperar as was to be expected;
    como era de esperar, llovió mucho as was to be expected o as you might expect, there was a lot of rain
    3. [tener confianza en] to expect;
    no esperábamos esta reacción we didn't expect this reaction;
    espero que venga esta noche I expect (that) she'll come tonight;
    esperar algo de alguien to expect sth from sb, to hope for sth from sb;
    espero discreción de usted I expect discretion from you, I expect you to be discreet;
    ¿y qué esperabas (de alguien así)? what did you expect (from someone like that)?;
    no esperaba menos de él I expected no less of him
    4. [ser inminente para] to await, to be in store for;
    nos esperan un buen baño y una cama there's a nice warm bath and a bed waiting for us;
    le esperan dificultades he's in for some problems, there are problems in store for him;
    Fam
    ¡me espera una buena en casa! I'm in for it when I get home!;
    Fam
    ¡no sabes la o [m5] lo que te espera! you don't know what you're in for!
    ♦ vi
    1. [aguardar] to wait;
    espera en este despacho wait in this office;
    espera, que ya voy wait a minute, I'm coming;
    espera un instante o [m5]momento, ¿no es el famoso Pedro Valverde? hang on o wait a minute, isn't that the famous Pedro Valverde?;
    no creo que puedas hacerlo – espera y verás I don't think you'll be able to do it – just (you) wait and see;
    su enfado no se hizo esperar it didn't take long for her anger to surface;
    Fam
    si crees que te voy a dejar dinero, puedes esperar sentado if you think I'm going to lend you some money, you've got another think coming;
    hacer esperar a alguien to keep sb waiting, to make sb wait;
    me hiciste esperar una hora you kept me waiting (for) an hour;
    quien espera desespera a watched pot never boils
    2. [estar embarazada] to be expecting;
    está esperando desde hace cuatro meses she's four months pregnant
    * * *
    I v/t
    1 ( aguardar) wait for;
    hacerse esperar keep people waiting
    2 con esperanza hope;
    (así) lo espero I hope so, hopefully;
    espero que no I hope not, hopefully not;
    es de esperar que it is to be hoped that
    3 ( suponer, confiar en) expect
    4
    :
    esperar un hijo be expecting a baby
    5
    :
    de aquí te espero fam incredible fam
    II v/i ( aguardar) wait;
    puedes esperar sentado you’re in for a long wait
    * * *
    1) aguardar: to wait for, to await
    2) : to expect
    3) : to hope
    espero poder trabajar: I hope to be able to work
    espero que sí: I hope so
    : to wait
    * * *
    1. (aguardar) to wait / to wait for
    ¿hace mucho que esperas? have you been waiting long?
    2. (creer, imaginar) to expect
    3. (tener esperanza, desear) to hope

    Spanish-English dictionary > esperar

  • 13 ἔρχομαι

    ἔρχομαι impv. ἔρχου, ἔρχεσθε; impf. ἠρχόμην; fut. ἐλεύσομαι; 2 aor. ἦλθον, and the mixed forms ἦλθα (W-S. §13, 13; B-D-F §81, 3; Mlt-H. 208f), ἤλθοσαν (LXX; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 12 [Stone p. 54]), ἤλθωσαν (GJs 21:1; ἤλθωσιν17:3; s. deStrycker p. 246f); pf. ἐλήλυθα; plpf. 3 sg. ἐληλύθει 3 Km 10:10, 12 (Hom.+). This multipurpose marker is not readily susceptible to precise classification, but the following outline of usage covers the principal lines:
    ① of movement from one point to another, with focus on approach from the narrator’s perspective, come
    ⓐ of movement itself
    α. abs. ἔρχου καὶ ἔρχεται Mt 8:9; Lk 7:8; cp. Mt 22:3; Lk 14:17; J 5:7; Ac 10:29; 1 Cor 11:34; Rv 8:3 al. κραυγὴ γέγονεν• ἰδοὺ ὁ νυμφίος ἔρχεται Mt 25:6 v.l. (Jos., Bell. 5, 272 βοῶντες• ὁ υἱὸς ἔρχεται). οἱ ἐρχόμενοι καὶ οἱ ὑπάγοντες Mk 6:31. ἦλθε δρομέως came on the run AcPl Ha 4, 30 (TestAbr A 5 p. 82, 24 [Stone p. 12] ἦλθεν δρομαία ἐπʼ αὐτούς=Sarah came to them on the run). Also w. the specif. mng. come back, return (Hom. et al.; Bar 4:37; 1 Esdr 5:8; Tob 2:3 BA) J 4:27; 9:7; Ro 9:9; of Joseph GJs 16:2 (foll. by κατέβη of Mary; both Joseph and Mary ‘return’ from an uninhabited area). Come before the judgment-seat of God 2 Cl 9:4. Come in a hostile sense Lk 11:22 P75 et al. (cp. X., Hellenica 6, 5, 43).
    β. used w. prepositions: ἀπό w. gen. of place (Herodian 1, 17, 8 ἀ. τοῦ λουτροῦ; ἀ. βορρᾶς PsSol 11:3; ἀ. τῆς μεγάλης πόλεως TestAbr A 2 p. 78, 30 [Stone p. 4]) Mk 7:1; 15:21; Ac 18:2; 2 Cor 11:9; w. gen. of pers. Mk 5:35; J 3:2b; Gal 2:12.—ἐκ w. gen. of place Lk 5:17; J 3:31b.—εἰς w. acc. of place into Mt 2:11; 8:14; 9:1; Mk 1:29; 5:38; Lk 23:42 (cp. 1bα below, end); J 11:30; εἰς Κόρινθον AcPl Ha 6, 2 (εἰς τὸν παράδεισον TestAbr A 11 p. 90, 1 [Stone p. 28]). to, toward J 11:38; 20:3. εἰς τὸ πέραν Mt 8:28; 16:5. εἰς τ. ἑορτήν to the festival, i.e. to celebrate it J 4:45b; 11:56. ἐκ … εἰς J 4:54.—διά w. gen. of place and εἰς Mk 7:31; ὁ … ἐρχόμενος διᾶ τῆς θύρας one who enters by the gate 10:2 (P75).—μετά w. gen. of pers. ἵνα ἔλθῶ μετʼ αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ δόξη τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ so that I might return with him in the glory of his Father AcPl Ha 10, 8. ἐν w. dat. of the thing w. which one comes Ro 15:29. ἐν ῥάβδῳ 1 Cor 4:21, also to denote the state of being in which one comes ἐν πνεύματι Lk 2:27; cp. Ro 15:32; w. dat. of the pers. who accompanies someone Jd 14.—ἐπί w. acc. of place over Mt 14:28, to (JosAs 26:5; ParJer 8:4; Jos., Ant. 7, 16; Just., D. 88, 3) Lk 19:5; Ac 12:10, 12; w. acc. of thing to (PTor I, 1; II, 29 [116 B.C.] ἔρχεσθαι ἐπὶ τὸ κριτήριον; Jos., Ant. 12, 395) Mt 3:7; Mk 11:13b; w. acc. of pers. to (ἐπὶ γυναῖκα Just., A I, 33, 3) J 19:33; Ac 24:8 v.l.; against Lk 14:31 (1 Macc 5:39 ἔρχ. ἐπί τινα εἰς πόλεμον; Jos., Ant. 7, 233; Mel., P. 17, 114).—κατά w. acc. of place to Lk 10:33; Ac 16:7; AcPl Ha 2, 5.—παρά w. acc. of place to Mt 15:29; w. gen. of pers. from Lk 8:49.—πρός w. acc. of pers. to (X., Mem. 1, 2, 27; En 106:4; JosAs 3:6; Jos., Ant. 2, 106; 11, 243; Just., D. 77, 4) Mt 3:14; 7:15; Mk 9:14; Lk 1:43; J 1:29, 47; 2 Cor 13:1 and oft. ἀπό τινος (gen. of pers.) πρός τινα 1 Th 3:6.
    γ. w. an adverb of place ἄνωθεν ἔ. J 3:31. ἐκεῖ 18:3. ἐνθάδε 4:16. ὄπισθεν Mk 5:27. πόθεν (Jdth 10:12) J 3:8; 8:14; Rv 7:13. ποῦ Hb 11:8. ὧδε Mt 8:29; Ac 9:21 (ApcEsdr 5:10; ApcSed 9:4; cp. ParJer 7:16 ἐνταῦθα. The adv. w. a case funct. as prep. ἄχρι τινός Ac 11:5. ἐγγύς τινος Hv 4, 1, 9. ἕως τινός Lk 4:42 (ApcMos 34 ἐλθὲ ἕως ἐμοῦ).
    δ. w. a case, without a prep.: dat. of pers. come to someone (Aeschyl., Prom. 358; Thu. 1, 13, 3; X., An. 7, 7, 30; BGU 1041, 16 [II A.D.] ὅτι ἔρχομαί σοι) Mt 21:5 (Zech 9:9); Rv 2:5, 16.
    ε. The purpose of coming is expressed by an inf. (Eur., Med. 1270, also Palaeph. p. 62, 12; 1 Macc 16:22; Bel 40 Theod.; 1 Esdr 1:23; 5:63; TestSol 5 D ἦλθε θεάσασθαι; TestAbr B 5 p. 109, 21 [Stone p. 66] ἔρχομαι … κοιμηθῆναι; Just., D. 78, 7 ὸ̔ν ἐληλύθεισαν προσκυνῆσαι) Mt 2:2; 12:42; Mk 15:36; Lk 1:59; 3:12 al.; by a fut. ptc. (Hom. et al.) Mt 27:49; Ac 8:27; by a pres. ptc. Lk 13:6 (TestJob 9:8 αἰτοῦντες); by ἵνα J 10:10; 12:9b (TestJob 34:5; ApcMos 29); εἰς τοῦτο ἵνα Ac 9:21; διά τινα J 12:9a.
    ζ. Single forms of ἔ. are used w. other verbs to denote that a person, in order to do someth., must first come to a certain place: in parataxis ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθεν καί etc. (Ex 19:7; 2 Km 13:36; 2 Esdr 5:16; JosAs 10:6; TestJob 8:3; ApcMos 37) Mt 13:19, 25; Mk 2:18; 4:15; 5:33; 6:29; 12:9; 14:37; Lk 8:12, 47; J 6:15; 11:48; 12:22; 19:38; 20:19, 26; 21:13; 3J 3; Rv 5:7; 17:1; 21:9. ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε J 1:46; 11:34. ἔρχεσθε καὶ ὄψεσθε 1:39. A ptc. of ἔ. followed by a finite verb ἐλθών (Hdt. 2, 115; LXX; TestJob 7:1; Just., D. 8, 4 al.) Mt 2:8; 8:7; 9:10, 18 (cp. εἷς 3b; προσέρχομαι 1a); 12:44; 14:12; 18:31; 27:64; 28:13; Mk 7:25; 12:14, 42; 14:45; 16:1; Ac 16:37, 39. ἐρχόμενος Lk 13:14; 16:21; 18:5. The participial constr. is best transl. come and. In some pass. ἐλθών is to be rendered when (someone) has come J 16:8; 2 Cor 12:20; Phil 1:27 (opp. ἀπών).—Instead of the transcription ]λη λυθεισα POxy 1081, 3, read after the Coptic SJCh 88, 19–89, 1: ἐ]ληλύθεισαν.
    ⓑ of making an appearance come before the public, appear (cp. ἦλθον εἰς τόνδε τὸν κόσμον ‘I was born’ Ar. 1, 1).
    α. of Jesus as Messiah Lk 3:16; J 4:25; 7:27, 31, who for this reason (on the basis of pass. like Ps 117:26; Hab 2:3; Da 7:13 Theod.) is called ὁ ἐρχόμενος Mt 11:3; Lk 7:19f; Hb 10:37 (Hab 2:3), or ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου Mt 21:9; 23:39; Mk 11:9; Lk 13:35; 19:38; J 12:13 (in all cases Ps 117:26); also in John, in whose writings the idea of Jesus having come heaven-sent to the earth is of considerable importance J 16:28: (ὁ προφήτης) ὁ ἐρχόμενος εἰς τ. κόσμον J 6:14; 11:27 (cp. ἐρχόμενος εἰς τ. κόσμον ἐπὶ τὸ ὄρος τῶν ἐλαιῶν ParJer 9:20). Of the appearance of Jesus among humans (s. Harnack, ‘Ich bin gekommen’: ZTK 22, 1912, 1–30; AFrövig, D. Sendungsbewusstsein Jesu u. d. Geist 1924, 129ff) Mt 11:19; Lk 7:34; J 5:43; 7:28; 8:42. Foll. by the inf. of purpose Mt 5:17; 10:34f; Lk 19:10. W. ἵνα foll. J 10:10b (ἦλθον, as here, Herm. Wr. 1, 30). W. εἰς τ. κόσμον and ἵνα foll. 12:46; 18:37; εἰς κρίμα, ἵνα 9:39; w. inf. foll. 1 Ti 1:15. ἔ. ἐν σαρκί come in the flesh 1J 4:2; 2J 7; B 5:10f. εἰς σάρκα AcPlCor 1:14. ἔ διʼ ὕδατος καὶ αἵματος 1J 5:6 w. the continuation ἐν τ. ὕδατι καὶ ἐν τ. αἵματι (on the mng. of the prep. s. B-D-F §223, 3; 198, 4). ὀπίσω w. gen. come after of Christ in relation to his forerunner Mt 3:11; Mk 1:7; J 1:15, 27, 30. The idea of coming is even plainer in connection w. the coming of the Human One (Son of Man), the return of Jesus fr. his heavenly home Mt 10:23; Ac 1:11 (opp. πορεύεσθαι); 1 Cor 4:5; 11:26; 2 Th 1:10 (Just., D. 28, 2 al.). W. ἐν τῇ δόξῃ Mt 16:27; 25:31; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:26 (cp. ἔνδοξος … ἐλεύσεται Just., D. 49, 2). ἐπὶ τ. νεφελῶν μετὰ δυνάμεως καὶ δόξης Mt 24:30 (Just., D. 31, 1). ἐν νεφέλαις, νεφέλῃ etc. Mk 13:26; Lk 21:27. ἐν τ. βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ in his kingdom Mt 16:28; Lk 23:42 v.l.
    β. of forerunners of the Messiah and those who identify themselves as such: Elijah Mt 11:14; 17:10, 11, 12; Mk 9:11, 12, 13 (Just., D. 49, 1); John the Baptist Mt 11:18; Lk 7:33; J 1:31; w. εἰς μαρτυρίαν for testimony 1:7. Others, including false messiahs, false teachers, and an antichrist Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8 (ἐπὶ τ. ὀνόματί μου calling on my name); J 10:8; 2 Cor 11:4; 2 Pt 3:3; 1J 2:18.
    ② to proceed on a course, with destination in view, go (Hom. et al.; LXX) ὀπίσω τινός go with (lit. ‘after’) someone fig., of a disciple Mt 16:24; Mk 8:34 v.l.; Lk 9:23; 14:27. ἐπί τι go to someth. Mt 21:19; Mk 11:13a (w. indir. quest. foll.). πρός τινα Lk 15:20. σύν τινι J 21:3. ἔ. ὁδόν go on a journey (Hom. et al.) Lk 2:44. S. also 1bα above.
    ③ to change place or position, with implication of being brought, be brought (Hom. et al.; Thu. 6, 71, 2 χρήματα; Arrian, Anab. 2, 13, 5 ἀγγελία et al.) ὁ λύχνος the lamp is brought Mk 4:21. Sim. ἐλθούσης τ. ἐντολῆς when the commandment came Ro 7:9.
    ④ to take place, come
    ⓐ of time
    α. of temporal increments ἔρχονται ἡμέραι in future sense (1 Km 2:31; Am 8:11) Lk 23:29; Hb 8:8 (Jer 38:31); ἐλεύσονται ἡμ. Mt 9:15; Mk 2:20; Lk 5:35; 17:22; 21:6 (TestSol 13:7 C; Just., D. 40, 2). ἦλθεν ἡ ἡμέρα 22:7; Rv 6:17.—ἔρχεται ὥρα ὅτε the time is coming when J 4:21, 23; 5:25; 16:25; also ἔ. ὥρα ἐν ᾗ J 5:28; ἔ. ὥρα ἵνα 16:2, 32. ἦλθεν ἡ ὥρα the hour has come = the hour is here Mk 14:41b; J 16:4; Rv 14:7, 15; w. ἵνα foll. J 13:1 (ἥκω P66). ἐλήλυθεν ἡ ὥ. ἵνα 12:23; 16:32; without ἵνα 17:1; cp. 7:30; 8:20.—ἔρχεται νύξ 9:4 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 40 §159 νυκτὸς ἐρχομένης). ἡμέρα κυρίου 1 Th 5:2. καιροί Ac 3:20 (GrBar 8:1 ὁ καιρός). τὸ πλήρωμα τ. χρόνου Gal 4:4.
    β. of events and situations that are connected w. a certain time ὁ θερισμός J 4:35. ὁ γάμος τ. ἀρνίου Rv 19:7. ἡ κρίσις 18:10. So also the ptc. ἐρχόμενος coming, future, imminent: αἰὼν ἐ. (=הָעוֹלָם הַבָּא) the age to come Mk 10:30; Lk 18:30; ἑορτὴ ἐ. the coming festival Ac 18:21 v.l.; σάββατον ἐ. 13:44; ὀργὴ ἐ. the wrath which will be revealed (at the Judgment) 1 Th 1:10. τὰ ἐρχόμενα what is to come (Is 44:7 τὰ ἐπερχόμενα) J 16:13. Of God in Rv ὁ ὢν κ. ὁ ἦν κ. ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1:4, 8; 4:8.
    ⓑ of events and circumstances
    α. of natural or sensory phenomena (Hom. et al.; also TestAbr A 19 p. 102, 10 [Stone p. 52]; βροντῆς … καὶ ἀστραπῆς ἐλθούσης; ApcEsdr 5:7 νεφέλη) ποταμοί Mt 7:25, 27. κατακλυσμός Lk 17:27. λιμός Ac 7:11. Of rain ἔ. ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς come upon the earth Hb 6:7. Sim. of the coming down of birds fr. the air Mt 13:4, 32; Mk 4:4; of a voice resounding fr. heaven ἦλθεν φωνὴ ἐκ τ. οὐρανοῦ J 12:28 (Test Abr A 10 p. 88, 15 and 14 p. 94, 25 [Stone p. 24; p. 36]; Just., D. 88, 8; cp. Il. 10, 139; En 13:8; TestSol 1:3 VW; TestJob 3:1; ParJer 9:12; ApcEsdr 7:13).
    β. of transcendent and moral-spiritual phenomena: of spiritual coming of God come, appear J 14:23; of Christ ibid. and vss. 3, 18, 28; of the Paraclete 15:26; 16:7, 13.—ἡ ἀποστασία 2 Th 2:3. ἡ βασιλεία τ. θεοῦ Mt 6:10; Lk 11:2 (MBurrows, JBL 74, ’55, 1–8); 17:20; 22:18 al.; 1 Cl 42:3.—τ. σκάνδαλα Mt 18:7; Lk 17:1. τὰ ἀγαθά Ro 3:8 (cp. Jer. 17:6). τὸ τέλειον 1 Cor 13:10. ἡ πίστις Gal 3:23, 25.
    ⑤ ἐ. in var. prepositional combinations ἔ. ἐκ τ. θλίψεως have suffered persecution Rv 7:14. ἔ. εἰς τὸ χεῖρον Mk 5:26 (Witkowski no. 36, 12=White no. 35 τοῦ παιδίου εἰς τὰ ἔσχατα ἐληλυθότος of a child in desperate circumstances; TestAbr A 20 p. 102, 27 [Stone p. 52] εἰς θάνατον ἔρχονται). εἰς τοσαύτην ἀπόνοιαν, ὥστε 1 Cl 46:7 (Hyperid. 2, 5 εἰς τοῦτο ἀπονοίας ἔ., ὥστε). εἰς πειρασμόν Mk 14:38 (cp. Himerius, Or. 48 [Or. 14], 19 εἰς ἐπιθυμίαν ἐλθεῖν). εἰς ἀπελεγμόν Ac 19:27. εἰς τὴν ὥραν ταύτην J 12:27. ἔ. εἰς κρίσιν submit to judgment (letter of Philip in Demosth. 12, 11; 16; ApcEsdr 2:26 ἔλθωμεν ὁμοῦ εἰς κρίσιν) 5:24. εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν 1 Ti 2:4; 2 Ti 3:7 (Polyb. 6, 9, 12; Appian, Mithr. 31 §123 ἔρχεσθαι ἐς γνῶσίν τινος; Cebes 12, 3 εἰς τὴν ἀληθινὴν παιδείαν ἐλθεῖν; TestSol 20:5 εἰς ἔννοιαν ἐλθεῖν; Just., D. 90, 1 οὐδʼ εἰς ἔννοιαν τούτου ἐλθεῖν). ἵνα ἔλθω εἰς τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀνάστασιν so that I might realize the resurrection of the dead (cp. ApcMos 10 εἰς τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς ἀναστάσεως) AcPlCor 2:35. εἰς φανερόν come to light Mk 4:22; Lk 8:17. εἰς προκοπήν result in furthering Phil 1:12 (cp. Wsd 15:5). ἔ. εἴς τι of the writer of a letter come to, i.e. deal with someth. (a new subject) 2 Cor 12:1 (cp. w. ἐπὶ Ar. 2:1 al.; Just., D. 42 ἐπὶ τὸν λόγον). εἰς ἑαυτόν come to oneself (=to one’s senses) (Diod S 13, 95, 2; Epict. 3, 1, 15; TestJos 3:9; GrBar 17:3; Sb 5763, 35) Lk 15:17. ἐπί τινα of serious misfortunes come over someone (Dt 28:15; Jos., Ant. 4, 128) J 18:4 (cp. PIand 21, 2 ἡμῶν τὰ ἐρχόμενα οὐκ οἶδα); tortures IRo 5:3; blood upon the murderers Mt 23:35; the Holy Spirit comes down upon someone (cp. Ezk 2:2; Just., D. 49, 7; 88, 1 ἐλεύσεσθαι ἐπʼ αὐτὸν τὰς δυνάμεις) Mt 3:16; Lk 11:2 v.l.; Ac 19:6; peace Mt 10:13; the wrath of God Eph 5:6; cp. Col 3:6; ἡ βασιλεία Lk 11:2 D; ἔ. πρὸς τ. Ἰησοῦν come to Jesus = become disciples of Jesus J 5:40; 6:35, 37, 44f, 65; πρὸς τ. πατέρα 14:6. ἔ. ὑπὸ τὸν ζυγόν 1 Cl 16:17 (cp. PsSol 18, 7f. ὑπὸ ῥάβδον παιδείας Χριστοῦ).—Not infreq. the pres. ἔρχομαι has the mng. of the fut.: Mt 17:11; Lk 12:54 (corresp. to καύσων ἔσται vs. 55); 19:13; J 14:3. Esp. also ἕως ἔρχομαι until I shall come J 21:22f; 1 Ti 4:13; Hs 5, 2, 2; 9, 10, 5; 6; 9, 11, 1. S. B-D-F §323; 383, 1; Rob. 869. S. also 4aα above.—B. 696. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἔρχομαι

  • 14 Л-8

    В ЛАД PrepP Invar
    1. - чему, скем-чем (Prep
    the resulting PrepP is adv
    corresponding exactly to (the beat, rate, rhythm etc of sth.): in tune (keeping, accord, harmony, concert) with
    in time with to the rhythm of at one with.
    «Была бы у меня эта книжечка, - сказала Лёлька, провожая меня до порога с малышом на руках, - я бы спать не ложилась - её читала! День и ночь бы читала, глаз бы не перевела!» Её речь звучала в лад со сказкой - это наново поразило меня (Чуковская 2). "Had I this little book," said Lyolka as she accompanied me to the door with the baby in her arms, "I would not go to bed, I would read it! Night and day I would read it without closing my eyes!" I was struck again how much her words sounded in tune with the fairy-tale (2a).
    ...Сами себе Андрей и Настёна виделись в этот укромный час не настоящими, чужими -настолько покаянно и тихо, смиряя всё вокруг, с полным прощением перед прощанием, отходил этот крутой, горячий день. И они в лад его смирению говорили тихо, почти шёпотом (Распутин 2)....Andrei and Nastyona seemed unreal, strangers to themselves in this secluded hour-that was how funereally and quietly the abrupt, harsh, hot day departed, calming everything around them, with full forgiveness before its farewell. And they spoke softly, almost in a whisper, in keeping with the day's passing (2a).
    (Иван:) Быть может, настал час той славы, о которой мечтали вы с детства! Не уступите, не прозевайте... миллионы сердец бьются в лад с вами... (Олеша 6). (I.:) Perhaps now the hour has arrived of that glory of which you have been dreaming since childhood! Don't turn back, don't let the opportunity slip away, millions of hearts are beating in time with yours (6a).
    2.
    adv
    together, in harmony, synchronously
    in unison
    in concert in tune as one (man)
    Neg не в лад - out of step (tune, time).
    Мы поздоровались с классом. Ребята ответили негромко, но в лад. We said hello to the class, and the kids responded softly, though in unison.

    Большой русско-английский фразеологический словарь > Л-8

  • 15 в лад

    [PrepP; Invar]
    =====
    1. в лад чему, с кем-чем [Prep; the resulting PrepP is adv]
    ⇒ corresponding exactly to (the beat, rate, rhythm etc of sth.):
    - in tune (keeping, accord, harmony, concert) with;
    - at one with.
         ♦ "Была бы у меня эта книжечка, - сказала Лёлька, провожая меня до порога с малышом на руках, - я бы спать не ложилась - её читала! День и ночь бы читала, глаз бы не перевела!" Её речь звучала в лад со сказкой - это наново поразило меня (Чуковская 2). "Had I this little book," said Lyolka as she accompanied me to the door with the baby in her arms, "I would not go to bed, I would read it! Night and day I would read it without closing my eyes!" I was struck again how much her words sounded in tune with the fairy-tale (2a).
         ♦...Сами себе Андрей и Настёна виделись в этот укромный час не настоящими, чужими - настолько покаянно и тихо, смиряя всё вокруг, с полным прощением перед прощанием, отходил этот крутой, горячий день. И они в лад его смирению говорили тихо, почти шёпотом (Распутин 2)....Andrei and Nastyona seemed unreal, strangers to themselves in this secluded hour-that was how funereally and quietly the abrupt, harsh, hot day departed, calming everything around them, with full forgiveness before its farewell. And they spoke softly, almost in a whisper, in keeping with the day's passing (2a).
         ♦ [ Иван:] Быть может, настал час той славы, о которой мечтали вы с детства! Не уступите, не прозевайте... миллионы сердец бьются в лад с вами... (Олеша 6). [I.:] Perhaps now the hour has arrived of that glory of which you have been dreaming since childhood! Don't turn back, don't let the opportunity slip away; millions of hearts are beating in time with yours (6a).
    2. [adv]
    ⇒ together, in harmony, synchronously:
    || Neg не в лад≈ out of step (tune, time).
         ♦ Мы поздоровались с классом. Ребята ответили негромко, но в лад. We said hello to the class, and the kids responded softly, though in unison.

    Большой русско-английский фразеологический словарь > в лад

  • 16 Historical Portugal

       Before Romans described western Iberia or Hispania as "Lusitania," ancient Iberians inhabited the land. Phoenician and Greek trading settlements grew up in the Tagus estuary area and nearby coasts. Beginning around 202 BCE, Romans invaded what is today southern Portugal. With Rome's defeat of Carthage, Romans proceeded to conquer and rule the western region north of the Tagus, which they named Roman "Lusitania." In the fourth century CE, as Rome's rule weakened, the area experienced yet another invasion—Germanic tribes, principally the Suevi, who eventually were Christianized. During the sixth century CE, the Suevi kingdom was superseded by yet another Germanic tribe—the Christian Visigoths.
       A major turning point in Portugal's history came in 711, as Muslim armies from North Africa, consisting of both Arab and Berber elements, invaded the Iberian Peninsula from across the Straits of Gibraltar. They entered what is now Portugal in 714, and proceeded to conquer most of the country except for the far north. For the next half a millennium, Islam and Muslim presence in Portugal left a significant mark upon the politics, government, language, and culture of the country.
       Islam, Reconquest, and Portugal Created, 714-1140
       The long frontier struggle between Muslim invaders and Christian communities in the north of the Iberian peninsula was called the Reconquista (Reconquest). It was during this struggle that the first dynasty of Portuguese kings (Burgundian) emerged and the independent monarchy of Portugal was established. Christian forces moved south from what is now the extreme north of Portugal and gradually defeated Muslim forces, besieging and capturing towns under Muslim sway. In the ninth century, as Christian forces slowly made their way southward, Christian elements were dominant only in the area between Minho province and the Douro River; this region became known as "territorium Portu-calense."
       In the 11th century, the advance of the Reconquest quickened as local Christian armies were reinforced by crusading knights from what is now France and England. Christian forces took Montemor (1034), at the Mondego River; Lamego (1058); Viseu (1058); and Coimbra (1064). In 1095, the king of Castile and Léon granted the country of "Portu-cale," what became northern Portugal, to a Burgundian count who had emigrated from France. This was the foundation of Portugal. In 1139, a descendant of this count, Afonso Henriques, proclaimed himself "King of Portugal." He was Portugal's first monarch, the "Founder," and the first of the Burgundian dynasty, which ruled until 1385.
       The emergence of Portugal in the 12th century as a separate monarchy in Iberia occurred before the Christian Reconquest of the peninsula. In the 1140s, the pope in Rome recognized Afonso Henriques as king of Portugal. In 1147, after a long, bloody siege, Muslim-occupied Lisbon fell to Afonso Henriques's army. Lisbon was the greatest prize of the 500-year war. Assisting this effort were English crusaders on their way to the Holy Land; the first bishop of Lisbon was an Englishman. When the Portuguese captured Faro and Silves in the Algarve province in 1248-50, the Reconquest of the extreme western portion of the Iberian peninsula was complete—significantly, more than two centuries before the Spanish crown completed the Reconquest of the eastern portion by capturing Granada in 1492.
       Consolidation and Independence of Burgundian Portugal, 1140-1385
       Two main themes of Portugal's early existence as a monarchy are the consolidation of control over the realm and the defeat of a Castil-ian threat from the east to its independence. At the end of this period came the birth of a new royal dynasty (Aviz), which prepared to carry the Christian Reconquest beyond continental Portugal across the straits of Gibraltar to North Africa. There was a variety of motives behind these developments. Portugal's independent existence was imperiled by threats from neighboring Iberian kingdoms to the north and east. Politics were dominated not only by efforts against the Muslims in
       Portugal (until 1250) and in nearby southern Spain (until 1492), but also by internecine warfare among the kingdoms of Castile, Léon, Aragon, and Portugal. A final comeback of Muslim forces was defeated at the battle of Salado (1340) by allied Castilian and Portuguese forces. In the emerging Kingdom of Portugal, the monarch gradually gained power over and neutralized the nobility and the Church.
       The historic and commonplace Portuguese saying "From Spain, neither a good wind nor a good marriage" was literally played out in diplomacy and war in the late 14th-century struggles for mastery in the peninsula. Larger, more populous Castile was pitted against smaller Portugal. Castile's Juan I intended to force a union between Castile and Portugal during this era of confusion and conflict. In late 1383, Portugal's King Fernando, the last king of the Burgundian dynasty, suddenly died prematurely at age 38, and the Master of Aviz, Portugal's most powerful nobleman, took up the cause of independence and resistance against Castile's invasion. The Master of Aviz, who became King João I of Portugal, was able to obtain foreign assistance. With the aid of English archers, Joao's armies defeated the Castilians in the crucial battle of Aljubarrota, on 14 August 1385, a victory that assured the independence of the Portuguese monarchy from its Castilian nemesis for several centuries.
       Aviz Dynasty and Portugal's First Overseas Empire, 1385-1580
       The results of the victory at Aljubarrota, much celebrated in Portugal's art and monuments, and the rise of the Aviz dynasty also helped to establish a new merchant class in Lisbon and Oporto, Portugal's second city. This group supported King João I's program of carrying the Reconquest to North Africa, since it was interested in expanding Portugal's foreign commerce and tapping into Muslim trade routes and resources in Africa. With the Reconquest against the Muslims completed in Portugal and the threat from Castile thwarted for the moment, the Aviz dynasty launched an era of overseas conquest, exploration, and trade. These efforts dominated Portugal's 15th and 16th centuries.
       The overseas empire and age of Discoveries began with Portugal's bold conquest in 1415 of the Moroccan city of Ceuta. One royal member of the 1415 expedition was young, 21-year-old Prince Henry, later known in history as "Prince Henry the Navigator." His part in the capture of Ceuta won Henry his knighthood and began Portugal's "Marvelous Century," during which the small kingdom was counted as a European and world power of consequence. Henry was the son of King João I and his English queen, Philippa of Lancaster, but he did not inherit the throne. Instead, he spent most of his life and his fortune, and that of the wealthy military Order of Christ, on various imperial ventures and on voyages of exploration down the African coast and into the Atlantic. While mythology has surrounded Henry's controversial role in the Discoveries, and this role has been exaggerated, there is no doubt that he played a vital part in the initiation of Portugal's first overseas empire and in encouraging exploration. He was naturally curious, had a sense of mission for Portugal, and was a strong leader. He also had wealth to expend; at least a third of the African voyages of the time were under his sponsorship. If Prince Henry himself knew little science, significant scientific advances in navigation were made in his day.
       What were Portugal's motives for this new imperial effort? The well-worn historical cliche of "God, Glory, and Gold" can only partly explain the motivation of a small kingdom with few natural resources and barely 1 million people, which was greatly outnumbered by the other powers it confronted. Among Portuguese objectives were the desire to exploit known North African trade routes and resources (gold, wheat, leather, weaponry, and other goods that were scarce in Iberia); the need to outflank the Muslim world in the Mediterranean by sailing around Africa, attacking Muslims en route; and the wish to ally with Christian kingdoms beyond Africa. This enterprise also involved a strategy of breaking the Venetian spice monopoly by trading directly with the East by means of discovering and exploiting a sea route around Africa to Asia. Besides the commercial motives, Portugal nurtured a strong crusading sense of Christian mission, and various classes in the kingdom saw an opportunity for fame and gain.
       By the time of Prince Henry's death in 1460, Portugal had gained control of the Atlantic archipelagos of the Azores and Madeiras, begun to colonize the Cape Verde Islands, failed to conquer the Canary Islands from Castile, captured various cities on Morocco's coast, and explored as far as Senegal, West Africa, down the African coast. By 1488, Bar-tolomeu Dias had rounded the Cape of Good Hope in South Africa and thereby discovered the way to the Indian Ocean.
       Portugal's largely coastal African empire and later its fragile Asian empire brought unexpected wealth but were purchased at a high price. Costs included wars of conquest and defense against rival powers, manning the far-flung navel and trade fleets and scattered castle-fortresses, and staffing its small but fierce armies, all of which entailed a loss of skills and population to maintain a scattered empire. Always short of capital, the monarchy became indebted to bankers. There were many defeats beginning in the 16th century at the hands of the larger imperial European monarchies (Spain, France, England, and Holland) and many attacks on Portugal and its strung-out empire. Typically, there was also the conflict that arose when a tenuously held world empire that rarely if ever paid its way demanded finance and manpower Portugal itself lacked.
       The first 80 years of the glorious imperial era, the golden age of Portugal's imperial power and world influence, was an African phase. During 1415-88, Portuguese navigators and explorers in small ships, some of them caravelas (caravels), explored the treacherous, disease-ridden coasts of Africa from Morocco to South Africa beyond the Cape of Good Hope. By the 1470s, the Portuguese had reached the Gulf of Guinea and, in the early 1480s, what is now Angola. Bartolomeu Dias's extraordinary voyage of 1487-88 to South Africa's coast and the edge of the Indian Ocean convinced Portugal that the best route to Asia's spices and Christians lay south, around the tip of southern Africa. Between 1488 and 1495, there was a hiatus caused in part by domestic conflict in Portugal, discussion of resources available for further conquests beyond Africa in Asia, and serious questions as to Portugal's capacity to reach beyond Africa. In 1495, King Manuel and his council decided to strike for Asia, whatever the consequences. In 1497-99, Vasco da Gama, under royal orders, made the epic two-year voyage that discovered the sea route to western India (Asia), outflanked Islam and Venice, and began Portugal's Asian empire. Within 50 years, Portugal had discovered and begun the exploitation of its largest colony, Brazil, and set up forts and trading posts from the Middle East (Aden and Ormuz), India (Calicut, Goa, etc.), Malacca, and Indonesia to Macau in China.
       By the 1550s, parts of its largely coastal, maritime trading post empire from Morocco to the Moluccas were under siege from various hostile forces, including Muslims, Christians, and Hindi. Although Moroccan forces expelled the Portuguese from the major coastal cities by 1550, the rival European monarchies of Castile (Spain), England, France, and later Holland began to seize portions of her undermanned, outgunned maritime empire.
       In 1580, Phillip II of Spain, whose mother was a Portuguese princess and who had a strong claim to the Portuguese throne, invaded Portugal, claimed the throne, and assumed control over the realm and, by extension, its African, Asian, and American empires. Phillip II filled the power vacuum that appeared in Portugal following the loss of most of Portugal's army and its young, headstrong King Sebastião in a disastrous war in Morocco. Sebastiao's death in battle (1578) and the lack of a natural heir to succeed him, as well as the weak leadership of the cardinal who briefly assumed control in Lisbon, led to a crisis that Spain's strong monarch exploited. As a result, Portugal lost its independence to Spain for a period of 60 years.
       Portugal under Spanish Rule, 1580-1640
       Despite the disastrous nature of Portugal's experience under Spanish rule, "The Babylonian Captivity" gave birth to modern Portuguese nationalism, its second overseas empire, and its modern alliance system with England. Although Spain allowed Portugal's weakened empire some autonomy, Spanish rule in Portugal became increasingly burdensome and unacceptable. Spain's ambitious imperial efforts in Europe and overseas had an impact on the Portuguese as Spain made greater and greater demands on its smaller neighbor for manpower and money. Portugal's culture underwent a controversial Castilianization, while its empire became hostage to Spain's fortunes. New rival powers England, France, and Holland attacked and took parts of Spain's empire and at the same time attacked Portugal's empire, as well as the mother country.
       Portugal's empire bore the consequences of being attacked by Spain's bitter enemies in what was a form of world war. Portuguese losses were heavy. By 1640, Portugal had lost most of its Moroccan cities as well as Ceylon, the Moluccas, and sections of India. With this, Portugal's Asian empire was gravely weakened. Only Goa, Damão, Diu, Bombay, Timor, and Macau remained and, in Brazil, Dutch forces occupied the northeast.
       On 1 December 1640, long commemorated as a national holiday, Portuguese rebels led by the duke of Braganza overthrew Spanish domination and took advantage of Spanish weakness following a more serious rebellion in Catalonia. Portugal regained independence from Spain, but at a price: dependence on foreign assistance to maintain its independence in the form of the renewal of the alliance with England.
       Restoration and Second Empire, 1640-1822
       Foreign affairs and empire dominated the restoration era and aftermath, and Portugal again briefly enjoyed greater European power and prestige. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance was renewed and strengthened in treaties of 1642, 1654, and 1661, and Portugal's independence from Spain was underwritten by English pledges and armed assistance. In a Luso-Spanish treaty of 1668, Spain recognized Portugal's independence. Portugal's alliance with England was a marriage of convenience and necessity between two monarchies with important religious, cultural, and social differences. In return for legal, diplomatic, and trade privileges, as well as the use during war and peace of Portugal's great Lisbon harbor and colonial ports for England's navy, England pledged to protect Portugal and its scattered empire from any attack. The previously cited 17th-century alliance treaties were renewed later in the Treaty of Windsor, signed in London in 1899. On at least 10 different occasions after 1640, and during the next two centuries, England was central in helping prevent or repel foreign invasions of its ally, Portugal.
       Portugal's second empire (1640-1822) was largely Brazil-oriented. Portuguese colonization, exploitation of wealth, and emigration focused on Portuguese America, and imperial revenues came chiefly from Brazil. Between 1670 and 1740, Portugal's royalty and nobility grew wealthier on funds derived from Brazilian gold, diamonds, sugar, tobacco, and other crops, an enterprise supported by the Atlantic slave trade and the supply of African slave labor from West Africa and Angola. Visitors today can see where much of that wealth was invested: Portugal's rich legacy of monumental architecture. Meanwhile, the African slave trade took a toll in Angola and West Africa.
       In continental Portugal, absolutist monarchy dominated politics and government, and there was a struggle for position and power between the monarchy and other institutions, such as the Church and nobility. King José I's chief minister, usually known in history as the marquis of Pombal (ruled 1750-77), sharply suppressed the nobility and the
       Church (including the Inquisition, now a weak institution) and expelled the Jesuits. Pombal also made an effort to reduce economic dependence on England, Portugal's oldest ally. But his successes did not last much beyond his disputed time in office.
       Beginning in the late 18th century, the European-wide impact of the French Revolution and the rise of Napoleon placed Portugal in a vulnerable position. With the monarchy ineffectively led by an insane queen (Maria I) and her indecisive regent son (João VI), Portugal again became the focus of foreign ambition and aggression. With England unable to provide decisive assistance in time, France—with Spain's consent—invaded Portugal in 1807. As Napoleon's army under General Junot entered Lisbon meeting no resistance, Portugal's royal family fled on a British fleet to Brazil, where it remained in exile until 1821. In the meantime, Portugal's overseas empire was again under threat. There was a power vacuum as the monarch was absent, foreign armies were present, and new political notions of liberalism and constitutional monarchy were exciting various groups of citizens.
       Again England came to the rescue, this time in the form of the armies of the duke of Wellington. Three successive French invasions of Portugal were defeated and expelled, and Wellington succeeded in carrying the war against Napoleon across the Portuguese frontier into Spain. The presence of the English army, the new French-born liberal ideas, and the political vacuum combined to create revolutionary conditions. The French invasions and the peninsular wars, where Portuguese armed forces played a key role, marked the beginning of a new era in politics.
       Liberalism and Constitutional Monarchy, 1822-1910
       During 1807-22, foreign invasions, war, and civil strife over conflicting political ideas gravely damaged Portugal's commerce, economy, and novice industry. The next terrible blow was the loss of Brazil in 1822, the jewel in the imperial crown. Portugal's very independence seemed to be at risk. In vain, Portugal sought to resist Brazilian independence by force, but in 1825 it formally acknowledged Brazilian independence by treaty.
       Portugal's slow recovery from the destructive French invasions and the "war of independence" was complicated by civil strife over the form of constitutional monarchy that best suited Portugal. After struggles over these issues between 1820 and 1834, Portugal settled somewhat uncertainly into a moderate constitutional monarchy whose constitution (Charter of 1826) lent it strong political powers to exert a moderating influence between the executive and legislative branches of the government. It also featured a new upper middle class based on land ownership and commerce; a Catholic Church that, although still important, lived with reduced privileges and property; a largely African (third) empire to which Lisbon and Oporto devoted increasing spiritual and material resources, starting with the liberal imperial plans of 1836 and 1851, and continuing with the work of institutions like the Lisbon Society of Geography (established 1875); and a mass of rural peasants whose bonds to the land weakened after 1850 and who began to immigrate in increasing numbers to Brazil and North America.
       Chronic military intervention in national politics began in 19th-century Portugal. Such intervention, usually commencing with coups or pronunciamentos (military revolts), was a shortcut to the spoils of political office and could reflect popular discontent as well as the power of personalities. An early example of this was the 1817 golpe (coup) attempt of General Gomes Freire against British military rule in Portugal before the return of King João VI from Brazil. Except for a more stable period from 1851 to 1880, military intervention in politics, or the threat thereof, became a feature of the constitutional monarchy's political life, and it continued into the First Republic and the subsequent Estado Novo.
       Beginning with the Regeneration period (1851-80), Portugal experienced greater political stability and economic progress. Military intervention in politics virtually ceased; industrialization and construction of railroads, roads, and bridges proceeded; two political parties (Regenerators and Historicals) worked out a system of rotation in power; and leading intellectuals sparked a cultural revival in several fields. In 19th-century literature, there was a new golden age led by such figures as Alexandre Herculano (historian), Eça de Queirós (novelist), Almeida Garrett (playwright and essayist), Antero de Quental (poet), and Joaquim Oliveira Martins (historian and social scientist). In its third overseas empire, Portugal attempted to replace the slave trade and slavery with legitimate economic activities; to reform the administration; and to expand Portuguese holdings beyond coastal footholds deep into the African hinterlands in West, West Central, and East Africa. After 1841, to some extent, and especially after 1870, colonial affairs, combined with intense nationalism, pressures for economic profit in Africa, sentiment for national revival, and the drift of European affairs would make or break Lisbon governments.
       Beginning with the political crisis that arose out of the "English Ultimatum" affair of January 1890, the monarchy became discredtted and identified with the poorly functioning government, political parties splintered, and republicanism found more supporters. Portugal participated in the "Scramble for Africa," expanding its African holdings, but failed to annex territory connecting Angola and Mozambique. A growing foreign debt and state bankruptcy as of the early 1890s damaged the constitutional monarchy's reputation, despite the efforts of King Carlos in diplomacy, the renewal of the alliance in the Windsor Treaty of 1899, and the successful if bloody colonial wars in the empire (1880-97). Republicanism proclaimed that Portugal's weak economy and poor society were due to two historic institutions: the monarchy and the Catholic Church. A republic, its stalwarts claimed, would bring greater individual liberty; efficient, if more decentralized government; and a stronger colonial program while stripping the Church of its role in both society and education.
       As the monarchy lost support and republicans became more aggressive, violence increased in politics. King Carlos I and his heir Luís were murdered in Lisbon by anarchist-republicans on 1 February 1908. Following a military and civil insurrection and fighting between monarchist and republican forces, on 5 October 1910, King Manuel II fled Portugal and a republic was proclaimed.
       First Parliamentary Republic, 1910-26
       Portugal's first attempt at republican government was the most unstable, turbulent parliamentary republic in the history of 20th-century Western Europe. During a little under 16 years of the republic, there were 45 governments, a number of legislatures that did not complete normal terms, military coups, and only one president who completed his four-year term in office. Portuguese society was poorly prepared for this political experiment. Among the deadly legacies of the monarchy were a huge public debt; a largely rural, apolitical, and illiterate peasant population; conflict over the causes of the country's misfortunes; and lack of experience with a pluralist, democratic system.
       The republic had some talented leadership but lacked popular, institutional, and economic support. The 1911 republican constitution established only a limited democracy, as only a small portion of the adult male citizenry was eligible to vote. In a country where the majority was Catholic, the republic passed harshly anticlerical laws, and its institutions and supporters persecuted both the Church and its adherents. During its brief disjointed life, the First Republic drafted important reform plans in economic, social, and educational affairs; actively promoted development in the empire; and pursued a liberal, generous foreign policy. Following British requests for Portugal's assistance in World War I, Portugal entered the war on the Allied side in March 1916 and sent armies to Flanders and Portuguese Africa. Portugal's intervention in that conflict, however, was too costly in many respects, and the ultimate failure of the republic in part may be ascribed to Portugal's World War I activities.
       Unfortunately for the republic, its time coincided with new threats to Portugal's African possessions: World War I, social and political demands from various classes that could not be reconciled, excessive military intervention in politics, and, in particular, the worst economic and financial crisis Portugal had experienced since the 16th and 17th centuries. After the original Portuguese Republican Party (PRP, also known as the "Democrats") splintered into three warring groups in 1912, no true multiparty system emerged. The Democrats, except for only one or two elections, held an iron monopoly of electoral power, and political corruption became a major issue. As extreme right-wing dictatorships elsewhere in Europe began to take power in Italy (1922), neighboring Spain (1923), and Greece (1925), what scant popular support remained for the republic collapsed. Backed by a right-wing coalition of landowners from Alentejo, clergy, Coimbra University faculty and students, Catholic organizations, and big business, career military officers led by General Gomes da Costa executed a coup on 28 May 1926, turned out the last republican government, and established a military government.
       The Estado Novo (New State), 1926-74
       During the military phase (1926-32) of the Estado Novo, professional military officers, largely from the army, governed and administered Portugal and held key cabinet posts, but soon discovered that the military possessed no magic formula that could readily solve the problems inherited from the First Republic. Especially during the years 1926-31, the military dictatorship, even with its political repression of republican activities and institutions (military censorship of the press, political police action, and closure of the republic's rowdy parliament), was characterized by similar weaknesses: personalism and factionalism; military coups and political instability, including civil strife and loss of life; state debt and bankruptcy; and a weak economy. "Barracks parliamentarism" was not an acceptable alternative even to the "Nightmare Republic."
       Led by General Óscar Carmona, who had replaced and sent into exile General Gomes da Costa, the military dictatorship turned to a civilian expert in finance and economics to break the budget impasse and bring coherence to the disorganized system. Appointed minister of finance on 27 April 1928, the Coimbra University Law School professor of economics Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970) first reformed finance, helped balance the budget, and then turned to other concerns as he garnered extraordinary governing powers. In 1930, he was appointed interim head of another key ministry (Colonies) and within a few years had become, in effect, a civilian dictator who, with the military hierarchy's support, provided the government with coherence, a program, and a set of policies.
       For nearly 40 years after he was appointed the first civilian prime minister in 1932, Salazar's personality dominated the government. Unlike extreme right-wing dictators elsewhere in Europe, Salazar was directly appointed by the army but was never endorsed by a popular political party, street militia, or voter base. The scholarly, reclusive former Coimbra University professor built up what became known after 1932 as the Estado Novo ("New State"), which at the time of its overthrow by another military coup in 1974, was the longest surviving authoritarian regime in Western Europe. The system of Salazar and the largely academic and technocratic ruling group he gathered in his cabinets was based on the central bureaucracy of the state, which was supported by the president of the republic—always a senior career military officer, General Óscar Carmona (1928-51), General Craveiro Lopes (1951-58), and Admiral Américo Tómaz (1958-74)—and the complicity of various institutions. These included a rubber-stamp legislature called the National Assembly (1935-74) and a political police known under various names: PVDE (1932-45), PIDE (1945-69),
       and DGS (1969-74). Other defenders of the Estado Novo security were paramilitary organizations such as the National Republican Guard (GNR); the Portuguese Legion (PL); and the Portuguese Youth [Movement]. In addition to censorship of the media, theater, and books, there was political repression and a deliberate policy of depoliticization. All political parties except for the approved movement of regime loyalists, the União Nacional or (National Union), were banned.
       The most vigorous and more popular period of the New State was 1932-44, when the basic structures were established. Never monolithic or entirely the work of one person (Salazar), the New State was constructed with the assistance of several dozen top associates who were mainly academics from law schools, some technocrats with specialized skills, and a handful of trusted career military officers. The 1933 Constitution declared Portugal to be a "unitary, corporative Republic," and pressures to restore the monarchy were resisted. Although some of the regime's followers were fascists and pseudofascists, many more were conservative Catholics, integralists, nationalists, and monarchists of different varieties, and even some reactionary republicans. If the New State was authoritarian, it was not totalitarian and, unlike fascism in Benito Mussolini's Italy or Adolf Hitler's Germany, it usually employed the minimum of violence necessary to defeat what remained a largely fractious, incoherent opposition.
       With the tumultuous Second Republic and the subsequent civil war in nearby Spain, the regime felt threatened and reinforced its defenses. During what Salazar rightly perceived as a time of foreign policy crisis for Portugal (1936-45), he assumed control of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. From there, he pursued four basic foreign policy objectives: supporting the Nationalist rebels of General Francisco Franco in the Spanish Civil War (1936-39) and concluding defense treaties with a triumphant Franco; ensuring that General Franco in an exhausted Spain did not enter World War II on the Axis side; maintaining Portuguese neutrality in World War II with a post-1942 tilt toward the Allies, including granting Britain and the United States use of bases in the Azores Islands; and preserving and protecting Portugal's Atlantic Islands and its extensive, if poor, overseas empire in Africa and Asia.
       During the middle years of the New State (1944-58), many key Salazar associates in government either died or resigned, and there was greater social unrest in the form of unprecedented strikes and clandestine Communist activities, intensified opposition, and new threatening international pressures on Portugal's overseas empire. During the earlier phase of the Cold War (1947-60), Portugal became a steadfast, if weak, member of the US-dominated North Atlantic Treaty Organization alliance and, in 1955, with American support, Portugal joined the United Nations (UN). Colonial affairs remained a central concern of the regime. As of 1939, Portugal was the third largest colonial power in the world and possessed territories in tropical Africa (Angola, Mozambique, Guinea-Bissau, and São Tomé and Príncipe Islands) and the remnants of its 16th-century empire in Asia (Goa, Damão, Diu, East Timor, and Macau). Beginning in the early 1950s, following the independence of India in 1947, Portugal resisted Indian pressures to decolonize Portuguese India and used police forces to discourage internal opposition in its Asian and African colonies.
       The later years of the New State (1958-68) witnessed the aging of the increasingly isolated but feared Salazar and new threats both at home and overseas. Although the regime easily overcame the brief oppositionist threat from rival presidential candidate General Humberto Delgado in the spring of 1958, new developments in the African and Asian empires imperiled the authoritarian system. In February 1961, oppositionists hijacked the Portuguese ocean liner Santa Maria and, in following weeks, African insurgents in northern Angola, although they failed to expel the Portuguese, gained worldwide media attention, discredited the New State, and began the 13-year colonial war. After thwarting a dissident military coup against his continued leadership, Salazar and his ruling group mobilized military repression in Angola and attempted to develop the African colonies at a faster pace in order to ensure Portuguese control. Meanwhile, the other European colonial powers (Britain, France, Belgium, and Spain) rapidly granted political independence to their African territories.
       At the time of Salazar's removal from power in September 1968, following a stroke, Portugal's efforts to maintain control over its colonies appeared to be successful. President Americo Tomás appointed Dr. Marcello Caetano as Salazar's successor as prime minister. While maintaining the New State's basic structures, and continuing the regime's essential colonial policy, Caetano attempted wider reforms in colonial administration and some devolution of power from Lisbon, as well as more freedom of expression in Lisbon. Still, a great deal of the budget was devoted to supporting the wars against the insurgencies in Africa. Meanwhile in Asia, Portuguese India had fallen when the Indian army invaded in December 1961. The loss of Goa was a psychological blow to the leadership of the New State, and of the Asian empire only East Timor and Macau remained.
       The Caetano years (1968-74) were but a hiatus between the waning Salazar era and a new regime. There was greater political freedom and rapid economic growth (5-6 percent annually to late 1973), but Caetano's government was unable to reform the old system thoroughly and refused to consider new methods either at home or in the empire. In the end, regime change came from junior officers of the professional military who organized the Armed Forces Movement (MFA) against the Caetano government. It was this group of several hundred officers, mainly in the army and navy, which engineered a largely bloodless coup in Lisbon on 25 April 1974. Their unexpected action brought down the 48-year-old New State and made possible the eventual establishment and consolidation of democratic governance in Portugal, as well as a reorientation of the country away from the Atlantic toward Europe.
       Revolution of Carnations, 1974-76
       Following successful military operations of the Armed Forces Movement against the Caetano government, Portugal experienced what became known as the "Revolution of Carnations." It so happened that during the rainy week of the military golpe, Lisbon flower shops were featuring carnations, and the revolutionaries and their supporters adopted the red carnation as the common symbol of the event, as well as of the new freedom from dictatorship. The MFA, whose leaders at first were mostly little-known majors and captains, proclaimed a three-fold program of change for the new Portugal: democracy; decolonization of the overseas empire, after ending the colonial wars; and developing a backward economy in the spirit of opportunity and equality. During the first 24 months after the coup, there was civil strife, some anarchy, and a power struggle. With the passing of the Estado Novo, public euphoria burst forth as the new provisional military government proclaimed the freedoms of speech, press, and assembly, and abolished censorship, the political police, the Portuguese Legion, Portuguese Youth, and other New State organizations, including the National Union. Scores of political parties were born and joined the senior political party, the Portuguese Community Party (PCP), and the Socialist Party (PS), founded shortly before the coup.
       Portugal's Revolution of Carnations went through several phases. There was an attempt to take control by radical leftists, including the PCP and its allies. This was thwarted by moderate officers in the army, as well as by the efforts of two political parties: the PS and the Social Democrats (PPD, later PSD). The first phase was from April to September 1974. Provisional president General Antonio Spínola, whose 1974 book Portugal and the Future had helped prepare public opinion for the coup, met irresistible leftist pressures. After Spinola's efforts to avoid rapid decolonization of the African empire failed, he resigned in September 1974. During the second phase, from September 1974 to March 1975, radical military officers gained control, but a coup attempt by General Spínola and his supporters in Lisbon in March 1975 failed and Spínola fled to Spain.
       In the third phase of the Revolution, March-November 1975, a strong leftist reaction followed. Farm workers occupied and "nationalized" 1.1 million hectares of farmland in the Alentejo province, and radical military officers in the provisional government ordered the nationalization of Portuguese banks (foreign banks were exempted), utilities, and major industries, or about 60 percent of the economic system. There were power struggles among various political parties — a total of 50 emerged—and in the streets there was civil strife among labor, military, and law enforcement groups. A constituent assembly, elected on 25 April 1975, in Portugal's first free elections since 1926, drafted a democratic constitution. The Council of the Revolution (CR), briefly a revolutionary military watchdog committee, was entrenched as part of the government under the constitution, until a later revision. During the chaotic year of 1975, about 30 persons were killed in political frays while unstable provisional governments came and went. On 25 November 1975, moderate military forces led by Colonel Ramalho Eanes, who later was twice elected president of the republic (1976 and 1981), defeated radical, leftist military groups' revolutionary conspiracies.
       In the meantime, Portugal's scattered overseas empire experienced a precipitous and unprepared decolonization. One by one, the former colonies were granted and accepted independence—Guinea-Bissau (September 1974), Cape Verde Islands (July 1975), and Mozambique (July 1975). Portugal offered to turn over Macau to the People's Republic of China, but the offer was refused then and later negotiations led to the establishment of a formal decolonization or hand-over date of 1999. But in two former colonies, the process of decolonization had tragic results.
       In Angola, decolonization negotiations were greatly complicated by the fact that there were three rival nationalist movements in a struggle for power. The January 1975 Alvor Agreement signed by Portugal and these three parties was not effectively implemented. A bloody civil war broke out in Angola in the spring of 1975 and, when Portuguese armed forces withdrew and declared that Angola was independent on 11 November 1975, the bloodshed only increased. Meanwhile, most of the white Portuguese settlers from Angola and Mozambique fled during the course of 1975. Together with African refugees, more than 600,000 of these retornados ("returned ones") went by ship and air to Portugal and thousands more to Namibia, South Africa, Brazil, Canada, and the United States.
       The second major decolonization disaster was in Portugal's colony of East Timor in the Indonesian archipelago. Portugal's capacity to supervise and control a peaceful transition to independence in this isolated, neglected colony was limited by the strength of giant Indonesia, distance from Lisbon, and Portugal's revolutionary disorder and inability to defend Timor. In early December 1975, before Portugal granted formal independence and as one party, FRETILIN, unilaterally declared East Timor's independence, Indonesia's armed forces invaded, conquered, and annexed East Timor. Indonesian occupation encountered East Timorese resistance, and a heavy loss of life followed. The East Timor question remained a contentious international issue in the UN, as well as in Lisbon and Jakarta, for more than 20 years following Indonesia's invasion and annexation of the former colony of Portugal. Major changes occurred, beginning in 1998, after Indonesia underwent a political revolution and allowed a referendum in East Timor to decide that territory's political future in August 1999. Most East Timorese chose independence, but Indonesian forces resisted that verdict until
       UN intervention in September 1999. Following UN rule for several years, East Timor attained full independence on 20 May 2002.
       Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-2000
       After several free elections and record voter turnouts between 25 April 1975 and June 1976, civil war was averted and Portugal's second democratic republic began to stabilize. The MFA was dissolved, the military were returned to the barracks, and increasingly elected civilians took over the government of the country. The 1976 Constitution was revised several times beginning in 1982 and 1989, in order to reempha-size the principle of free enterprise in the economy while much of the large, nationalized sector was privatized. In June 1976, General Ram-alho Eanes was elected the first constitutional president of the republic (five-year term), and he appointed socialist leader Dr. Mário Soares as prime minister of the first constitutional government.
       From 1976 to 1985, Portugal's new system featured a weak economy and finances, labor unrest, and administrative and political instability. The difficult consolidation of democratic governance was eased in part by the strong currency and gold reserves inherited from the Estado Novo, but Lisbon seemed unable to cope with high unemployment, new debt, the complex impact of the refugees from Africa, world recession, and the agitation of political parties. Four major parties emerged from the maelstrom of 1974-75, except for the Communist Party, all newly founded. They were, from left to right, the Communists (PCP); the Socialists (PS), who managed to dominate governments and the legislature but not win a majority in the Assembly of the Republic; the Social Democrats (PSD); and the Christian Democrats (CDS). During this period, the annual growth rate was low (l-2 percent), and the nationalized sector of the economy stagnated.
       Enhanced economic growth, greater political stability, and more effective central government as of 1985, and especially 1987, were due to several developments. In 1977, Portugal applied for membership in the European Economic Community (EEC), now the European Union (EU) since 1993. In January 1986, with Spain, Portugal was granted membership, and economic and financial progress in the intervening years has been significantly influenced by the comparatively large investment, loans, technology, advice, and other assistance from the EEC. Low unemployment, high annual growth rates (5 percent), and moderate inflation have also been induced by the new political and administrative stability in Lisbon. Led by Prime Minister Cavaco Silva, an economist who was trained abroad, the PSD's strong organization, management, and electoral support since 1985 have assisted in encouraging economic recovery and development. In 1985, the PSD turned the PS out of office and won the general election, although they did not have an absolute majority of assembly seats. In 1986, Mário Soares was elected president of the republic, the first civilian to hold that office since the First Republic. In the elections of 1987 and 1991, however, the PSD was returned to power with clear majorities of over 50 percent of the vote.
       Although the PSD received 50.4 percent of the vote in the 1991 parliamentary elections and held a 42-seat majority in the Assembly of the Republic, the party began to lose public support following media revelations regarding corruption and complaints about Prime Minister Cavaco Silva's perceived arrogant leadership style. President Mário Soares voiced criticism of the PSD's seemingly untouchable majority and described a "tyranny of the majority." Economic growth slowed down. In the parliamentary elections of 1995 and the presidential election of 1996, the PSD's dominance ended for the time being. Prime Minister Antônio Guterres came to office when the PS won the October 1995 elections, and in the subsequent presidential contest, in January 1996, socialist Jorge Sampaio, the former mayor of Lisbon, was elected president of the republic, thus defeating Cavaco Silva's bid. Young and popular, Guterres moved the PS toward the center of the political spectrum. Under Guterres, the PS won the October 1999 parliamentary elections. The PS defeated the PSD but did not manage to win a clear, working majority of seats, and this made the PS dependent upon alliances with smaller parties, including the PCP.
       In the local elections in December 2001, the PSD's criticism of PS's heavy public spending allowed the PSD to take control of the key cities of Lisbon, Oporto, and Coimbra. Guterres resigned, and parliamentary elections were brought forward from 2004 to March 2002. The PSD won a narrow victory with 40 percent of the votes, and Jose Durão Barroso became prime minister. Having failed to win a majority of the seats in parliament forced the PSD to govern in coalition with the right-wing Popular Party (PP) led by Paulo Portas. Durão Barroso set about reducing government spending by cutting the budgets of local authorities, freezing civil service hiring, and reviving the economy by accelerating privatization of state-owned enterprises. These measures provoked a 24-hour strike by public-sector workers. Durão Barroso reacted with vows to press ahead with budget-cutting measures and imposed a wage freeze on all employees earning more than €1,000, which affected more than one-half of Portugal's work force.
       In June 2004, Durão Barroso was invited by Romano Prodi to succeed him as president of the European Commission. Durão Barroso accepted and resigned the prime ministership in July. Pedro Santana Lopes, the leader of the PSD, became prime minister. Already unpopular at the time of Durão Barroso's resignation, the PSD-led government became increasingly unpopular under Santana Lopes. A month-long delay in the start of the school year and confusion over his plan to cut taxes and raise public-sector salaries, eroded confidence even more. By November, Santana Lopes's government was so unpopular that President Jorge Sampaio was obliged to dissolve parliament and hold new elections, two years ahead of schedule.
       Parliamentary elections were held on 20 February 2005. The PS, which had promised the electorate disciplined and transparent governance, educational reform, the alleviation of poverty, and a boost in employment, won 45 percent of the vote and the majority of the seats in parliament. The leader of the PS, José Sôcrates became prime minister on 12 March 2005. In the regularly scheduled presidential elections held on 6 January 2006, the former leader of the PSD and prime minister, Aníbal Cavaco Silva, won a narrow victory and became president on 9 March 2006. With a mass protest, public teachers' strike, and street demonstrations in March 2008, Portugal's media, educational, and social systems experienced more severe pressures. With the spreading global recession beginning in September 2008, Portugal's economic and financial systems became more troubled.
       Owing to its geographic location on the southwestern most edge of continental Europe, Portugal has been historically in but not of Europe. Almost from the beginning of its existence in the 12th century as an independent monarchy, Portugal turned its back on Europe and oriented itself toward the Atlantic Ocean. After carving out a Christian kingdom on the western portion of the Iberian peninsula, Portuguese kings gradually built and maintained a vast seaborne global empire that became central to the way Portugal understood its individuality as a nation-state. While the creation of this empire allows Portugal to claim an unusual number of "firsts" or distinctions in world and Western history, it also retarded Portugal's economic, social, and political development. It can be reasonably argued that the Revolution of 25 April 1974 was the most decisive event in Portugal's long history because it finally ended Portugal's oceanic mission and view of itself as an imperial power. After the 1974 Revolution, Portugal turned away from its global mission and vigorously reoriented itself toward Europe. Contemporary Portugal is now both in and of Europe.
       The turn toward Europe began immediately after 25 April 1974. Portugal granted independence to its African colonies in 1975. It was admitted to the European Council and took the first steps toward accession to the European Economic Community (EEC) in 1976. On 28 March 1977, the Portuguese government officially applied for EEC membership. Because of Portugal's economic and social backwardness, which would require vast sums of EEC money to overcome, negotiations for membership were long and difficult. Finally, a treaty of accession was signed on 12 June 1985. Portugal officially joined the EEC (the European Union [EU] since 1993) on 1 January 1986. Since becoming a full-fledged member of the EU, Portugal has been steadily overcoming the economic and social underdevelopment caused by its imperial past and is becoming more like the rest of Europe.
       Membership in the EU has speeded up the structural transformation of Portugal's economy, which actually began during the Estado Novo. Investments made by the Estado Novo in Portugal's economy began to shift employment out of the agricultural sector, which, in 1950, accounted for 50 percent of Portugal's economically active population. Today, only 10 percent of the economically active population is employed in the agricultural sector (the highest among EU member states); 30 percent in the industrial sector (also the highest among EU member states); and 60 percent in the service sector (the lowest among EU member states). The economically active population numbers about 5,000,000 employed, 56 percent of whom are women. Women workers are the majority of the workforce in the agricultural and service sectors (the highest among the EU member states). The expansion of the service sector has been primarily in health care and education. Portugal has had the lowest unemployment rates among EU member states, with the overall rate never being more than 10 percent of the active population. Since joining the EU, the number of employers increased from 2.6 percent to 5.8 percent of the active population; self-employed from 16 to 19 percent; and employees from 65 to 70 percent. Twenty-six percent of the employers are women. Unemployment tends to hit younger workers in industry and transportation, women employed in domestic service, workers on short-term contracts, and poorly educated workers. Salaried workers earn only 63 percent of the EU average, and hourly workers only one-third to one-half of that earned by their EU counterparts. Despite having had the second highest growth of gross national product (GNP) per inhabitant (after Ireland) among EU member states, the above data suggest that while much has been accomplished in terms of modernizing the Portuguese economy, much remains to be done to bring Portugal's economy up to the level of the "average" EU member state.
       Membership in the EU has also speeded up changes in Portuguese society. Over the last 30 years, coastalization and urbanization have intensified. Fully 50 percent of Portuguese live in the coastal urban conurbations of Lisbon, Oporto, Braga, Aveiro, Coimbra, Viseu, Évora, and Faro. The Portuguese population is one of the oldest among EU member states (17.3 percent are 65 years of age or older) thanks to a considerable increase in life expectancy at birth (77.87 years for the total population, 74.6 years for men, 81.36 years for women) and one of the lowest birthrates (10.59 births/1,000) in Europe. Family size averages 2.8 persons per household, with the strict nuclear family (one or two generations) in which both parents work being typical. Common law marriages, cohabitating couples, and single-parent households are more and more common. The divorce rate has also increased. "Youth Culture" has developed. The young have their own meeting places, leisure-time activities, and nightlife (bars, clubs, and discos).
       All Portuguese citizens, whether they have contributed or not, have a right to an old-age pension, invalidity benefits, widowed persons' pension, as well as payments for disabilities, children, unemployment, and large families. There is a national minimum wage (€385 per month), which is low by EU standards. The rapid aging of Portugal's population has changed the ratio of contributors to pensioners to 1.7, the lowest in the EU. This has created deficits in Portugal's social security fund.
       The adult literacy rate is about 92 percent. Illiteracy is still found among the elderly. Although universal compulsory education up to grade 9 was achieved in 1980, only 21.2 percent of the population aged 25-64 had undergone secondary education, compared to an EU average of 65.7 percent. Portugal's higher education system currently consists of 14 state universities and 14 private universities, 15 state polytechnic institutions, one Catholic university, and one military academy. All in all, Portugal spends a greater percentage of its state budget on education than most EU member states. Despite this high level of expenditure, the troubled Portuguese education system does not perform well. Early leaving and repetition rates are among the highest among EU member states.
       After the Revolution of 25 April 1974, Portugal created a National Health Service, which today consists of 221 hospitals and 512 medical centers employing 33,751 doctors and 41,799 nurses. Like its education system, Portugal's medical system is inefficient. There are long waiting lists for appointments with specialists and for surgical procedures.
       Structural changes in Portugal's economy and society mean that social life in Portugal is not too different from that in other EU member states. A mass consumption society has been created. Televisions, telephones, refrigerators, cars, music equipment, mobile phones, and personal computers are commonplace. Sixty percent of Portuguese households possess at least one automobile, and 65 percent of Portuguese own their own home. Portuguese citizens are more aware of their legal rights than ever before. This has resulted in a trebling of the number of legal proceeding since 1960 and an eight-fold increase in the number of lawyers. In general, Portuguese society has become more permissive and secular; the Catholic Church and the armed forces are much less influential than in the past. Portugal's population is also much more culturally, religiously, and ethnically diverse, a consequence of the coming to Portugal of hundreds of thousands of immigrants, mainly from former African colonies.
       Portuguese are becoming more cosmopolitan and sophisticated through the impact of world media, the Internet, and the World Wide Web. A prime case in point came in the summer and early fall of 1999, with the extraordinary events in East Timor and the massive Portuguese popular responses. An internationally monitored referendum in East Timor, Portugal's former colony in the Indonesian archipelago and under Indonesian occupation from late 1975 to summer 1999, resulted in a vote of 78.5 percent for rejecting integration with Indonesia and for independence. When Indonesian prointegration gangs, aided by the Indonesian military, responded to the referendum with widespread brutality and threatened to reverse the verdict of the referendum, there was a spontaneous popular outpouring of protest in the cities and towns of Portugal. An avalanche of Portuguese e-mail fell on leaders and groups in the UN and in certain countries around the world as Portugal's diplomats, perhaps to compensate for the weak initial response to Indonesian armed aggression in 1975, called for the protection of East Timor as an independent state and for UN intervention to thwart Indonesian action. Using global communications networks, the Portuguese were able to mobilize UN and world public opinion against Indonesian actions and aided the eventual independence of East Timor on 20 May 2002.
       From the Revolution of 25 April 1974 until the 1990s, Portugal had a large number of political parties, one of the largest Communist parties in western Europe, frequent elections, and endemic cabinet instability. Since the 1990s, the number of political parties has been dramatically reduced and cabinet stability increased. Gradually, the Portuguese electorate has concentrated around two larger parties, the right-of-center Social Democrats (PSD) and the left-of-center Socialist (PS). In the 1980s, these two parties together garnered 65 percent of the vote and 70 percent of the seats in parliament. In 2005, these percentages had risen to 74 percent and 85 percent, respectively. In effect, Portugal is currently a two-party dominant system in which the two largest parties — PS and PSD—alternate in and out of power, not unlike the rotation of the two main political parties (the Regenerators and the Historicals) during the last decades (1850s to 1880s) of the liberal constitutional monarchy. As Portugal's democracy has consolidated, turnout rates for the eligible electorate have declined. In the 1970s, turnout was 85 percent. In Portugal's most recent parliamentary election (2005), turnout had fallen to 65 percent of the eligible electorate.
       Portugal has benefited greatly from membership in the EU, and whatever doubts remain about the price paid for membership, no Portuguese government in the near future can afford to sever this connection. The vast majority of Portuguese citizens see membership in the EU as a "good thing" and strongly believe that Portugal has benefited from membership. Only the Communist Party opposed membership because it reduces national sovereignty, serves the interests of capitalists not workers, and suffers from a democratic deficit. Despite the high level of support for the EU, Portuguese voters are increasingly not voting in elections for the European Parliament, however. Turnout for European Parliament elections fell from 40 percent of the eligible electorate in the 1999 elections to 38 percent in the 2004 elections.
       In sum, Portugal's turn toward Europe has done much to overcome its backwardness. However, despite the economic, social, and political progress made since 1986, Portugal has a long way to go before it can claim to be on a par with the level found even in Spain, much less the rest of western Europe. As Portugal struggles to move from underde-velopment, especially in the rural areas away from the coast, it must keep in mind the perils of too rapid modern development, which could damage two of its most precious assets: its scenery and environment. The growth and future prosperity of the economy will depend on the degree to which the government and the private sector will remain stewards of clean air, soil, water, and other finite resources on which the tourism industry depends and on which Portugal's world image as a unique place to visit rests. Currently, Portugal is investing heavily in renewable energy from solar, wind, and wave power in order to account for about 50 percent of its electricity needs by 2010. Portugal opened the world's largest solar power plant and the world's first commercial wave power farm in 2006.
       An American documentary film on Portugal produced in the 1970s described this little country as having "a Past in Search of a Future." In the years after the Revolution of 25 April 1974, it could be said that Portugal is now living in "a Present in Search of a Future." Increasingly, that future lies in Europe as an active and productive member of the EU.

    Historical dictionary of Portugal > Historical Portugal

  • 17 महा _mahā

    1
    महा A cow.
    2
    महा The substitute of महत् at the beginning of Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhi compounds, and also at the beginning of some other irregular words. (Note: The number of compounds of which महा is the first mem- ber is very large, and may be multiplied ad infinitum. The more important of them, or such as have peculiar significations, are given below.)
    -Comp. -अक्षः an epithet of Śiva. ˚पटलिक a chief keeper of archives.
    -अङ्ग a. huge, bulky.
    -(ङ्गः) 1 a camel.
    -2 a kind of rat.
    -3 N. of Śiva.
    -अञ्जनः N. of a mountain.
    -अत्ययः a great danger or calamity.
    -अध्वनिक a. 'having gone a long way', dead.
    -अध्वरः a great sacrifice.
    -अनसम् 1 a heavy carriage.
    -2 cooking utensils. (
    -सी) a kitchen-maid. (
    -सः, -सम्) a kitchen; सूपानस्य करिष्यामि कुशलो$स्मि महानसे Mb.4.2.2.
    -अनिलः a whirl- wind; महानिलेनेव निदाघजं रजः Ki.14.59.
    -अनुभाव a.
    1 of great prowess, dignified, noble, glorious, magnanimous, exalted, illustrious; ग्रहीतुमार्यान् परिचर्यया मुहुर्महानु- भावा हि नितान्तमर्थिनः Śi.1.17; Ś.3.
    -2 virtuous, righteous, just.
    (-वः) 1 a worthy or respectable person.
    -2 (pl.) people of a religious sect in Mahārāṣtra founded by Chakradhara in the 13th century.
    -अन्तकः 1 death.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -अन्धकारः 1 thick darkness.
    -2 gross (spiritual) ignorance.
    -अन्ध्राः (pl.) N. of a people and their country.
    -अन्वय, -अभिजन a. nobly-born, of noble birth. (
    -यः, -नः) noble birth, high descent.
    -अभिषवः the great extraction of Soma.
    -अमात्यः the chief or prime minister (of a king).
    -अम्बुकः an epithet of Śiva.
    -अम्बुजम् a billion.
    -अम्ल a. very sour. (
    -म्लम्) the fruit of the tamarind tree. अरण्यम् a great (dreary) forest, large forest.
    -अर्घ a. very costly, costing a high price; महार्घस्तीर्थानामिव हि महतां को$प्यतिशयः U.6.11. (
    -र्घः) a kind of quail.
    -अर्घ्य a.
    1 valuable, precious.
    -2 invaluable; ines- timable; see महार्ह below.
    -अर्चिस् a. flaming high.
    -अर्णवः 1 the great ocean.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -अर्थ a.
    1 rich.
    -2 great, noble, dignified.
    -3 important, weighty.
    -4 significant.
    -अर्बुदम् one thousand millions.
    -अर्ह a.
    1 very valuable, very costly; महार्हशय्यापरिवर्तनच्युतैः स्वकेशपुष्पैरपि या स्म दूयते Ku.5.12.
    -2 invaluable, inestimable; महार्हशयनोपेत किं शेषे निहतो भुवि Rām.6.19. 2. (
    -र्हम्) white sandal-wood.
    -अवरोहः the fig-tree.
    -अशनिध्वजः a great banner in the form of the thunderbolt; जहार चान्येन मयूरपत्रिणा शरेण शक्रस्य महाशनि- ध्वजम् R.3.56.
    - अशन a. voracious, gluttonous; Mb. 4.
    -अश्मन् m. a precious stone, ruby.
    -अष्टमी the eighth day in the bright half of Āśvina sacred to Durgā; आश्विने शुक्लपक्षस्य भवेद् या तिथिरष्टमी । महाष्टमीति सा प्रोक्ता......
    -असिः a large sword.
    -असुरी N. of Durgā.
    -अह्नः the afternoon.
    -आकार a. extensive, large, great.
    -आचार्यः 1 a great teacher.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -आढ्य a. wealthy, very rich. (
    -ढ्यः) the Kadamba tree.
    -आत्मन् a.
    1 high-souled, high-minded, magnanimous, noble; अयं दुरात्मा अथवा महात्मा कौटिल्यः Mu.7; द्विषन्ति मन्दाश्चरितं महात्मनाम् Ku.5.75; U.1.49; प्रकृतिसिद्धमिदं हि महात्मनाम् Bh.1.63.
    -2 illustrious, distinguished, exalted, eminent; किमाचाराः किमाहाराः क्व च वासो महात्मनाम् Mb.3. 1.4.
    -3 mighty (महाबल); अथायमस्यां कृतवान् महात्मा लङ्केश्वरः कष्टमनार्यकर्म Rām.5.9.74. (-m.)
    1 the Supreme Spirit; युगपत्तु प्रलीयन्ते यदा तस्मिन् महात्मनि Ms.1.54.
    -2 the great principle, i. e. intellect of the Sāṅkhyas. (महात्मवत् means the same as महात्मन्).
    -आनकः a kind of large drum.
    -आनन्दः, -नन्दः 1 great joy or bliss.
    -2 espe- cially, the great bliss of final beatitude.
    (-न्दा) 1 spirituous liquor.
    -2 a festival on the ninth day in the bright half of Māgha.
    -आपगा a great river.
    -आयुधः an epithet of Śiva.
    -आरम्भ a. undertaking great works, enterprizing. (
    -म्भः) any great enterprize.
    -आलयः 1 a temple in general.
    -2 a sanctuary, an asylum.
    -3 a great dwelling.
    -4 a place of pilgrimage.
    -5 the world of Brahman.
    -6 the Supreme Spirit.
    -7 a tree &c. sacred to a deity.
    -8 N. of a particular dark fortnight.
    -9 पितृश्राद्ध in the month of Bhādra- pada. (
    -या) N. of a particular deity.
    - आशय a. high- souled, nobleminded, magnanimous, noble; दैवात् प्रबुद्धः शुश्राव वराहो हि महाशयः Ks; राजा हिरण्यगर्भो महाशयः H.4; see महात्मन्.
    (-यः) 1 a noble-minded or magnanimous person; महाशयचक्रवर्ती Bv.1.7.
    -2 the ocean.
    -आस्पद a.
    1 occupying a great position.
    -2 mighty, powerful.
    -आहवः a great or tumultuous fight.
    -इच्छ a.
    1 magnanimous, noble-minded, high-souled, noble; मही महेच्छः परिकीर्य सूनौ R.18.33.
    -2 having lofty aims or aspirations, ambitious; विद्यावतां महेच्छानां...... नाश्रयः पार्थिवं विना Pt.1.37.
    -इन्द्रः 1 'the great Indra', N. of Indra; इयं महेन्द्रप्रभृतीनधिश्रियः Ku.5.53; R.13.2; Ms.7.7.
    -2 a chief or leader in general.
    -3 N. of a mountain range; पतिर्महेन्द्रस्य महोदधेश्च R.6.54;4.39,43. ˚चापः rain-bow. ˚नगरी N. of Amarāvatī, the capital of Indra. ˚मन्त्रिन् m. an epithet of Bṛihaspati. ˚वाहः the elephant Airāvata; महेन्द्रवाहप्रतिमो महात्मा Mb.9.17.52.
    -इभ्य a. very rich.
    -इषुः a great archer; अधिरोहति गाण्डीवं महेषौ Ki.13.16.
    -इष्वासः a great archer, a great warrior; अत्र शूरा महेष्वासा भामार्जुनसमा युधि Bg.1.4.
    -ईशः, -ईशानः N. of Śiva; महेशस्त्वां धत्ते शिरसि रसराजस्य जयिनीम् Udb. ˚बन्धुः the Bilva tree.
    -ईशानी N. of Pārvatī.
    -ईश्वरः 1 a great lord, sovereign; महेश्वरस्त्र्यम्बक एव नापरः R.; गोप्तारं न निधीनां कथयन्ति महेश्वरं विबुधाः Pt.2.74.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -3 of Viṣṇu.
    -4 a god (opp. प्रकृति).
    -5 the Supreme Being (परमात्मा); मायां तु प्रकृतिं विद्यान्मायिनं तु महेश्वरम् Śvet. Up.4.1. ˚सखः N. of Kubera; यया कैलासभवने महेश्वरसखं बली Mb.9.11.55.
    (-री) 1 N. of Durgā.
    -2 a kind of bell-metal.
    -उक्षः (for उक्षन्) a large bull; a full grown or strong bull; महोक्षतां वत्सतरः स्पृशन्निव R.3.32;4.22;6.72; Śi.5.63.
    -उत्पलम् a large blue lotus. (
    -लः) the Sārasa bird.
    -उत्सवः 1 a great festival or occasion of joy; नयनविषयं जन्मन्येकः स एव महोत्सवः Māl.1.36.
    -2 the god of love.
    -उत्साह a. possessed of great energy, energetic, persevering; अहं च कर्णं जानामि...... सत्यसंधं महोत्साहं...... Mb.3.91.2.
    (-हः) 1 perseverance.
    -2 great pride; ये जात्यादिमहो- त्साहान्नरेन्द्रान्नोपयान्ति च । तेषामामरणं भिक्षा प्रायश्चितं विनिर्मितम् ॥ Pt.1.38.
    -उदधिः 1 the great ocean; महोदधेः पूर इवेन्दु- दर्शनात् R.3.17.
    -2 an epithet of Indra. ˚जः a conch- shell, shell.
    - उदय a. very prosperous or lucky, very glorious or splendid, of great prosperity.
    (-यः) 1 (a) great elevation or rise, greatness, prosperity; नन्दस्त्वतीन्द्रियं दृष्ट्वा लोकपालमहोदयम् Bhāg.1.28.1; अपवर्ग- महोदयार्थयोर्भुवमंशाविव धर्मयोर्गतौ R.8.16. (b) great fortune or good luck. (c) greatness, pre-eminence.
    -2 final beatitude.
    -3 a lord, master.
    -4 N. of the district called Kānyakubja or Kanouja; see App.
    -5 N. of the capital of Kanouja.
    -6 sour milk mixed with honey.
    -7 = महात्मन् q. v.; संसक्तौ किमसुलभं महोदयानाम Ki.7.27. ˚पर्वन् a time of union of the middle of श्रवण नक्षत्र and the end of व्यतिपात (generally in the month of माघ or पौष at the beginning of अमावास्या).
    - उदर a. big-bellied, corpulent.
    -(रम्) 1 a big belly.
    -2 dropsy.
    -उदार a.
    1 very generous or magnanimous.
    -2 mighty, powerful.
    -उद्यम a. = महोत्साह q. v; महोद्यमाः कर्म समा- रभन्ते.
    -उद्योग a. very industrious or diligent, hard- working.
    -उद्रेकः a particular measure (= 4 प्रस्थs).
    -उन्नत a. exceedingly lofty. (
    -तः) the palmyra tree.
    -उन्नतिः f. great rise or elevation (fig. also), high rank.
    -उपकारः a great obligation.
    -उपाध्यायः a great preceptor, a learned teacher.
    -उरगः a great serpent; वपुर्महोरगस्येव करालफणमण्डलम् R.12.98.
    -उरस्क a. broad-chested. (
    -स्कः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -उर्मिन् m. the ocean; ततः सागरमासाद्य कुक्षौ तस्य महोर्मिणः Mb.3.2.17.
    -उल्का 1 a great meteor.
    -2 a great fire-brand.
    -ऋत्विज् m. 'great priest', N. of the four chief sacri- ficial priests.
    -ऋद्धि a. very prosperous, opulent. (-f.) great prosperity or affluence.
    -ऋषभः a great bull.
    -ऋषिः 1 a great sage or saint; यस्मादृषिः परत्वेन महांस्त- स्मान्महर्षयः; (the term is applied in Ms.1.34 to the ten Prajāpatis or patriarchs of mankind, but it is also used in the general sense of 'a great sage').
    -2 N. of Sacute;iva.
    -3 of Buddha.
    -ओघ a. having a strong current.
    -घः a very large number; शतं खर्व- सहस्राणां समुद्रमभिधीयते । शतं समुद्रसाहस्रं महौघमिति विश्रुतम् ॥ Rām.6.28.37.
    -ओष्ठ (महोष्ठ) a. having large lips. (
    -ष्ठः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -ओजस् a. very mighty or powerful, possessed of great splendour or glory; महौजसा मानधना धनार्चिताः Ki.1.19. (-m.) a great hero or warrior, a champion. (-n.) great vigour.
    -ओजसम् the discus of Viṣṇu (सुदर्शन). (
    -सी) N. of plant (Mar. कांगणी).
    -ओदनी Asparagus Racemosus (Mar. शतावरी).
    -ओषधिः f.
    1 a very efficacious medicinal plant, a sovereign drug.
    -2 the Dūrvā grass.
    -3 N. of various plants ब्राह्मी, श्वेतकण्टकारी, कटुका, अतिविष &c. ˚गणः a collection of great or medicinal herbs:-- पृश्निपर्णी श्यामलता भृङ्गराजः शतावरी । गुड्चा सहदेवी च महौषधिगणः स्मृतः ॥ cf. also सहदेवी तथा व्याघ्री बला चातिबला त्वचा । शङ्खपुष्पी तथा सिंही अष्टमी च सुवर्चला ॥ महौषध्यष्टकं प्रोक्तं....
    -औषधम् 1 a sovereign remedy, panacea.
    -2 ginger.
    -3 garlic.
    -4 a kind of poison (वत्सनाभ).
    -कच्छः 1 the sea.
    -2 N. of Varuṇa.
    -3 a mountain.
    -कन्दः garlic.
    -कपर्दः a kind of shell.
    -कपित्थः 1 the Bilva tree.
    -2 red garlic.
    -कम्बु a. stark naked. (
    -म्बुः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -कर a.
    1 large-handed.
    -2 having a large revenue.
    -कर्णः an epithet of Śiva.
    -कर्मन् a. doing great works. (-m.) an epithet of Śiva.
    -कला the night of the new moon.
    -कल्पः a great cycle of time (1 years of Brahman); Bhāg.7.15.69.
    -कविः 1 a great poet, a classical poet, such as कालिदास, भवभूति, बाण, भारवि &c.
    -2 an epithet of Śukra.
    -कषायः N. of a plant (Mar. कायफळ).
    -कान्तः an epithet of Śiva. (
    -ता) the earth.
    -काय a. big-bodied, big, gigantic, bulky.
    (-यः) 1 an elephant.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -3 of Viṣṇu.
    -4 of a being attending on Śiva (= नन्दि).
    -कारुणिक a. exceedingly compassionate.
    -कार्तिकी the night of full-moon in the month of Kārtika.
    -कालः 1 a form of Śiva in his character as the destroyer of the world; महाकालं यजेद्देव्या दक्षिणे धूम्रवर्णकम् Kālītantram.
    -2 N. of a cele- brated shrine or temple of Śiva (Mahākāla) (one of the 12 celebrated Jyotirliṅgas) established at Ujjayinī (immortalized by Kālidāsa in his Meghadūta, which gives a very beautiful description of the god, his temple, worship &c., together with a graphic picture of the city; cf. Me.3-38; also R.6.34); महाकालनिवासिनं कालीविलासिनमनश्वरं महेश्वरं समाराध्य Dk.1.1.
    -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -4 N. of a kind of gourd.
    -5 N. of Śiva's servant (नन्दि). ˚पुरम् the city of Ujjayinī. ˚फलम् a red fruit with black seeds; पक्वं महाकालफलं किलासीत् N.22.29.
    -काली an epithet of Durgā in her terrific form.
    -काव्यम् a great or classical poem; (for a full description of its nature, contents &c., according to Rhetoricians see S. D.559). (The number of Mahākāvyas is usually said to be five:-- रघुवंश, कुमारसंभव, किरातार्जुनीय, शिशुपालवध and नैषधचरित or six, if मेघदूत-- a very small poem or खण़्डकाव्य-- be added to the list. But this enumeration is apparently only traditional, as there are several other poems, such as the भट्टिकाव्य, विक्रमाङ्कदेवचरित, हरविजय &c. which have an equal claim to be considered as Mahākāvyas).
    -कीर्तनम् a house.
    -कुमारः the eldest son of a reigning prince, heir-apparent.
    -कुल, -कुलीन a. of noble birth or descent, sprung from a noble family, nobly born. (
    -लम्) a noble birth or family, high descent.
    -कुहः a species of parasitical worm.
    -कृच्छ्रम् a great penance.
    -केतुः N. of Śiva.
    -केशः, -कोशः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 a large sheath.
    -क्रतुः a great sacrifice; e. g. a horse-sacrifice; तदङ्गमग्ऱ्यं मघवन् महाक्रतोरमुं तुरङ्गं प्रतिमोक्तुमर्हसि R.3.46.
    -क्रमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -क्रोधः an epithet of Śiva.
    -क्षत्रपः a great satrap.
    -क्षीरः sugar-cane.
    -क्षीरा f. a She-buffalo; Nighaṇṭaratnākara.
    -खर्वः, -र्वम् a high number (ten billions ?).
    -गजः a great elephant; see दिक्करिन्.
    -गणपतिः a form of the god Gaṇeśa.
    -गदः fever.
    -गन्ध a. exceedingly fragrant. (
    -न्धः) a kind of cane. (
    -न्धम्) a kind of sandal- wood. (
    -न्धा) N. of Chāmuṇḍā.
    -गर्तः, -गर्भः -गीतः N. of Śiva.
    -गर्दभगन्धिका N. of a plant, भारङ्गी.
    -गल a. longnecked.
    -गवः Bos gavaeus.
    -गुण a. very efficacious, sovereign (as a medicine); त्वया ममैष संबन्धः कपिमुख्य महागुणः Rām.5.1.12. (
    -णः) a chief quality, cardinal virtue.
    -गुरुः a highly respectable or venerable person; (these are three, the father, mother and preceptor; पिता माता तथाचार्यो महागुरुरिति स्मृतः).
    -गुल्मा the Soma plant.
    -गृष्टिः f. a cow with a large hump.
    -ग्रहः 1 an epithet of Rāhu.
    -2 the sun; महाग्रहग्राहविनष्टपङ्कः Rām.5.5.6.
    -ग्रामः N. of the ancient capital of Ceylon, the modern Māgama.
    -ग्रीवः 1 a camel.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -ग्रीविन् m. a camel.
    -घूर्णा spirituous liquor.
    -घृतम् ghee kept for a long time (for medicinal purposes).
    -घोष a. noisy, loud-sounding. (
    -षम्) a market, fair. (
    -षः) a loud noise, clamour.
    -चक्रम् the mystic circle in the शाक्त ceremonial.
    -चक्रवर्तिन् m. a universal monarch.
    -चण्डा N. of Chāmuṇḍā.
    -चपला a kind of metre.
    -चमूः f. a large army.
    -छायः the fig-tree.
    -जङ्घः a camel.
    -जटः an epithet of Śiva.
    -जटा 1 a great braid of hair.
    -2 the matted hair of Śiva.
    -जत्रु a. having a great collar-bone. (
    -त्रुः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -जनः 1 a multitude of men, a great many beings, the general populace or public; महाजनो येन गतः स पन्थाः Mb.3.313. 117; आगम्य तु ततो राजा विसृज्य च महाजनम् 6.98.25.
    -2 the populace, mob; विलोक्य वृद्धोक्षमधिष्ठितं त्वया महाजनः स्मेरमुखो भविष्यति Ku.5.7.
    -3 a great man, a distinguished or eminent man; महाजनस्य संसर्गः कस्य नोन्नतिकारकः । पद्मपत्रस्थितं तोयं धत्ते मुक्ताफलश्रियम् Pt.3.6.
    -4 the chief of a caste or trade.
    -5 a merchant, tradesman.
    -जवः an antelope.
    -जातीय a.
    1 rather large.
    -2 of an excellent kind.
    -जालिः, -ली N. of a plant (Mar. सोनामुखी)
    -जिह्वः an epithet of Śiva.
    -ज्ञानिन् m.
    1 a very learned man.
    -2 a great sage.
    -3 N. of Śiva.
    -ज्यैष्ठी the day of fullmoon in the month of Jyeṣṭha; ताभिर्दृश्यत एष यान् पथि महाज्यैष्ठीमहे मन्महे N.15.89; पूर्णिमा रविवारेण महाज्यैष्ठी प्रकीर्तिता Agni P.121.63.
    -ज्योतिस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -ज्वरः great affliction.
    -ज्वाल a. very brilliant or shining.
    (-लः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 a sacrificial fire.
    -डीनम् a kind of flight; 'यानं महाडीनमाहुः पवित्रामूर्जितां गतिम्' Mb.8.41.27 (com.).
    -तपस् m.
    1 a great ascetic.
    -2 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -तलम् N. of one of the seven lower regions; see पाताल.
    -तारा N. of a Buddhist goddess.
    -तिक्तः the Nimba tree.
    -तिथिः the 6th day of a lunation.
    -तीक्ष्ण a. exceedingly sharp or pungent. (
    -क्ष्णा) the marking- nut plant.
    -तेजस् a.
    1 possessed of great lustre or splendour.
    -2 very vigorous or powerful, heroic. (-m.)
    1 a hero, warrior.
    -2 fire.
    -3 an epithet of Kārtikeya. (-n.) quick-silver.
    -त्याग, -त्यागिन् a. very generous. (-m.) N. of Śiva.
    -दंष्ट्रः a species of big tiger.
    -दन्तः 1 an elephant with large tusks.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -दण्डः 1 a long arm.
    -2 a severe punishment.
    -दम्भः an epithet of Śiva.
    -दशा the influence exercised (over a man's destiny) by a predominant planet.
    -दानम् the gift of gold equal to one's own weight; अथातः संप्रवक्ष्यामि महादानस्य लक्षणम्.
    -दारु n. the devadāru tree.
    -दुर्गम् a great calamity; Pt.
    -दूषकः a kind of grain.
    -देवः N. of Śiva.
    (-वी) 1 N. of Pārvatī.
    -2 the chief queen.
    -द्रुमः the sacred fig-tree.
    -द्वारम् a large gate, the chief or outer gate of a temple.
    -धन a.
    1 rich.
    -2 expensive, costly; हेमदण्डैर्महाधनैः Rām.7. 77.13.
    (-नम्) 1 gold.
    -2 incense.
    -3 a costly or rich dress.
    -4 agriculture, husbandry.
    -5 anything costly or precious.
    -6 great booty.
    -7 a great battle (Ved.).
    -धनुस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -धातुः 1 gold.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -3 lymph.
    -4 N. of Meru.
    -धी a. having a great understanding.
    -धुर्यः a full-grown draught ox.
    -ध्वजः a camel.
    -ध्वनिक a. dead.
    -नग्नः an athlete; Buddh.
    -नटः an epithet of Śiva; महानटः किं नु...... तनोति...... साम्प्रतमङ्गहारम् N.22.7; महानटबाहुनेव बद्धभुजाङ्केन Vās.
    -नदः a great river.
    -नदी 1 a great river, such as Gaṅgā, Kṛiṣṇā; मन्दरः पर्वतश्चाक्षो जङ्घा तस्य महानदी Mb.8.34.2; संभूयाम्भोधिमभ्येति महानद्या नगापगा Śi.2.1.
    -2 N. of a river falling into the bay of Bengal.
    -नन्दा 1 spirituous liquor.
    -2 N. of a river.
    -3 ninth day of the bright half of the month of Māgha; माघमासस्य या शुक्ला नवमी लोकपूजिचा । महानन्देति सा प्रोक्ता....
    -नरकः N. of one of the 21 hells.
    -नलः a kind of reed.
    -नवमी the ninth day in the bright half of Āśvina, sacred to the worship of Durgā ततो$नु नवमी यस्मात् सा महानवमी स्मृता.
    -नाटकम् 'the great drama', N. of a drama, also called Hanumannāṭaka, (being popularly ascribed to Hanumat); thus defined by S. D.:-- एतदेव यदा सर्वैः पताकास्थानकैर्युतम् । अङ्कैश्च दशभिर्धीरा महानाटकमूचिरे ॥
    -नाडी sinew, tendon.
    -नादः 1 a loud sound, uproar.
    -2 a great drum.
    -3 a thunder-cloud.
    -4 a shell.
    -5 an elephant.
    -6 a lion.
    -7 the ear.
    -8 a camel.
    -9 an epithet of Śiva. (
    -दम्) a musical instrument.
    -नाम्नी 1 N. of a परिशिष्ट of Sāmaveda.
    -2 (pl.) N. of 9 verses of Sāmaveda beginning with विदा मघवन् विदा.
    -नायकः 1 a great gem in the centre of a string of pearls.
    -2 a great head or chief.
    -नासः an epithet of Śiva.
    -निद्र a. fast asleep. (
    -द्रा) 'the great sleep', death.
    -निम्नम् intestines, abdomen.
    -नियमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -निर्वाणम् total extinction of individuality (according to the Buddhists).
    -निशा 1 the dead of night, the second and third watches of the night; महानिशा तु विज्ञेया मध्यमं प्रहरद्वयम्
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -नीचः a washerman.
    -नील a. dark-blue. (
    -लः) a kind of sapphire or emerald; इन्द्रनीलमहानीलमणिप्रवरवेदिकम् Rām.5.9.16; महा- महानीलशिलारुचः Śi.1.16;4.44; R.18.42; Kau. A.2.11. 29. ˚उपलः a sapphire.
    -नृत्यः, -नेत्रः an epithet of Śiva.
    -नेमिः a crow.
    -न्यायः the chief rule.
    -पक्ष a.
    1 having many adherents.
    -2 having a large family or retinue; महापक्षे धनिन्यार्थे निक्षेपं निक्षिपेद् बुधः Ms.8.179.
    (-क्षः) 1 an epithet of Garuḍa.
    -2 a kind of duck. (
    -क्षी) an owl.
    -पङ्क्तिः, -पदपङ्क्तिः a kind of metre.
    -पञ्चमूलम् the five great roots:-- बिल्वो$ग्निमन्थः श्योनाकः काश्मरी पाटला तथा । सर्वैस्तु मिलितैरेतैः स्यान्महापञ्चमूलकम् ॥
    -पञ्चविषम् the five great or deadly poisons:-- शृङ्गी च कालकूटश्च मुस्तको वत्सनाभकः । शङ्खकर्णीति योगो$यं महापञ्चविषाभिधः ॥
    -पटः the skin.
    -पथः 1 chief road, principal street, high or main road; संतानकाकीर्णमहापथं तत् Ku.7.3.
    -2 the passage into the next world, i. e. death.
    -3 N. of certain mountain-tops from which devout persons used to throw themselves down to secure entrance into heaven.
    -4 an epithet of Śiva.
    -5 the long pilgrimage to mount Ke- dāra.
    -6 the way to heaven.
    -7 the knowledge of the essence of Śiva acquired in the pilgrimage to Kedāra.
    -पथिक a.
    1 undertaking great journeys.
    -2 one receiving Śulka (toll) on the high way; cf. Mb.12.76.6 (com. महापथिकः समुद्रे नौयानेन गच्छन् यद्वा महापथि शुल्कग्राहकः)
    -पद्मः 1 a particular high number.
    -2 N. of Nārada.
    -3 N. of one of the nine treasures of Kubera.
    -4 N. of the southernmost elephant supporting the world.
    -5 an epithet of Nanda.
    -6 a Kinnara attendant on Kubera.
    (-द्मम्) 1 a white lotus.
    -2 N. of a city. ˚पतिः N. of Nanda.
    -पराकः a. a particular penance; Hch.
    -पराङ्णः a late hour in the afternoon.
    -पवित्रः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -पशुः large cattle; महापशूनां हरणे... दण्डं प्रकल्पयेत् Ms.8.324.
    -पातः a long flight; Pt.2.58.
    -पातकम् 1 a great sin, a heinous crime; ब्रह्महत्या सुरापानं स्तेयं गुर्वङ्गनागमः । महान्ति पातकान्याहुस्तत्संसर्गश्च पञ्चमम् ॥ Ms.1154.
    -2 any great sin or transgression.
    -पात्रः a prime minister.
    -पादः an epithet of Śiva.
    -पाप्मन् a. very sinful or wicked.
    -पुराणम् N. of a Purāṇa; महापुराणं विज्ञेयमेकादशकलक्षणम् Brav. P.
    -पुंसः a great man.
    -पुरुषः 1 a great man, an eminent or distinguished personage; शब्दं महापुरुषसंविहितं निशम्य U. 6.7.
    -2 the Supreme Spirit.
    -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -पौरुषिकः a worshipper of Viṣṇu; तदहं ते$भिधास्यामि महापौरुषिको भवान् Bhāg.2.1.1.
    -पुष्पः a kind of worm.
    -पूजा great worship; any solemn worship performed on extraordinary occasions.
    -पृष्ठः a camel.
    -पोटगलः a kind of large reed.
    -प्रजापतिः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -प्रतीहारः a chief door-keeper.
    -प्रपञ्चः the great universe.
    -प्रभ a. of great lustre. (
    -भः) the light of a lamp.
    -प्रभुः 1 a great lord.
    -2 a king, sovereign.
    -3 a chief.
    -4 an epithet of Indra.
    -5 of Śiva
    -6 of Viṣṇu.
    -7 a great saint or holy man.
    -प्रलयः 'the great dissolution', the total annihilation of the universe at the end of the life of Brahman, when all the lokas with their inha- bitants, the gods, saints &c. including Brahman himself are annihilated; महाप्रलयमारुत...... Ve.3.4.
    -प्रश्नः a knotty question.
    -प्रसादः 1 a great favour.
    -2 a great present (of food offered to an idol); पादोदकं च निर्माल्यं नैवेद्यं च विशेषतः । महाप्रसाद इत्युक्त्वा ग्राह्यं विष्णोः प्रयत्नतः
    -प्रस्थानम् 1 departing this life, death.
    -2 setting out on a great journey for ending life; इहैव निधनं याम महाप्रस्थानमेव वा Rām.2.47.7 (com. महाप्रस्थानं मरणदीक्षा- पूर्वकमुत्तराभिमुखगमनम्); Mb.1.2.365.
    -प्राणः 1 the hard breathing or aspirate sound made in the pronunciation of the aspirates.
    -2 the aspirated letters themselves (pl.); they are:-- ख्, घ्, छ्, झ्, ठ्, ढ्, थ्, ध्, फ्, भ्, श्, ष्, स्, ह्.
    -3 a raven.
    -प्राणता possession of great strength or essence; अन्यांश्च जीवत एव महाप्राणतया स्फुरतो जग्राह K.
    -प्रेतः a noble departed spirit.
    -प्लवः a great flood, deluge;... क्षिप्तसागरमहाप्लवामयम् Śi.14.71.
    -फल a.
    1 bearing much fruit.
    -2 bringing much reward.
    (-ला) 1 a bitter gourd.
    -2 a kind of spear.
    (-लम्) 1 a great fruit or reward.
    -2 a testicle.
    -फेना the cuttle-fish bone.
    -बन्धः a peculiar position of hands or feet.
    -बभ्रुः a kind of animal living in holes.
    -बल a. very strong; नियुज्यमानो राज्याय नैच्छद्राज्यं महाबलः Rām
    (-लः) 1 wind, storm.
    -2 a Buddha.
    -3 a solid bamboo.
    -4 a palm.
    -5 a crocodile.
    -बला N. of a plant; महाबला च पीतपुष्पा सहदेवी च सा स्मृता Bhāva. P. (
    -लम्) lead. ˚ईश्वरः N. of a Liṅga of Śiva near the modern Mahābaleśwara.
    -बाध a. causing great pain or damage.
    -बाहु a. long-armed, powerful. (
    -हुः) an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -बि(वि)लम् 1 the atmosphere.
    -2 the heart.
    -3 a water-jar, pitcher.
    -4 a hole, cave.
    -बिसी a variety of skin (चर्म), a product of द्वादशग्राम in the Himālayas.
    -बी(वी)जः an epithet of Śiva.
    -बी (वी)ज्यम् the perinæum.
    -बुध्न a. having a great bottom or base (as a mountain).
    -बुशः barley.
    -बृहती a kind of metre.
    -बोधिः 1 the great intelligence of a Buddha.
    -2 a Buddha.
    -ब्रह्मम्, -ब्रह्मन् n. the Supreme Spirit.
    -ब्राह्मणः 1 a great or learned Brāhmaṇa.
    -2 a low or contemptible Brāhmaṇa.
    -भटः a great warrior; तदोजसा दैत्यमहाभटार्पितम् Bhāg.
    -भद्रा N. of the river Gaṅgā.
    -भाग a.
    1 very fortunate or blessed, very lucky or prosperous.
    -2 illustrious, distinguished, glo- rious; उभौ धर्मौ महाभागौ Mb.12.268.3; महाभागः कामं नरपतिरभिन्नस्थितिरसौ Ś.5.1; Ms.3.192.
    -3 very pure or holy, highly virtuous; पतिव्रता महाभागा कथं नु विचरिष्यति Mb.4.3.16.
    -भागता, -त्वम्, -भाग्यम् 1 extreme good fortune, great good luck, prosperity.
    -2 great excel- lence or merit.
    -भागवतम् the great Bhāgavata, one of the 18 Purāṇas. (
    -तः) a great worshipper of Viṣṇu.
    -भागिन् a. very fortunate or prosperous.
    -भाण्डम् a chief treasury.
    -भारतम् N. of the celebrated epic which describes the rivalries and contests of the sons of Dhṛitarāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu. (It consists of 18 Parvans or books, and is said to be the composition of Vyāsa; cf. the word भारत also); महत्त्वाद्भारतत्वाच्च महाभारतमुच्यते
    -भाष्यम् 1 a great commentary.
    -2 particularly, the great commentary of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini.
    -भासुरः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -भिक्षुः N. of Śākyamuni.
    -भीता a kind of sensitive plant (लाजाळू).
    -भीमः an epithet of king Śantanu.
    -भीरुः a sort of beetle or fly.
    -भुज a. long-armed, powerful.
    -भूतम् a great or primary element; see भूत; तस्यैतस्य महाभूतस्य निःश्वसितमेतद्यदृग्वेदः Up.; तं वेधा विदधे नूनं महाभूतसमाधिना R.1. 29; Ms.1.6.
    (-तः) 1 the Supreme Being.
    -2 a great creature.
    -भोगः 1 a great enjoyment.
    -2 a great coil or hood; great winding.
    -3 a serpent. (
    -गा) an epi- thet of Durgā.
    -मणिः 1 a costly or precious jewel; संस्कारोल्लिखितो महामणिरिव क्षीणो$पि नालक्ष्यते Ś.6.5.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -मति a.
    1 high-minded.
    -2 clever. (
    -तिः) N. of Bṛihaspati or Jupiter.
    -मत्स्यः a large fish, sea-monster.
    -मद a. greatly intoxicated. (
    -दः) an elephant in rut.
    -मनस्, -मनस्क a.
    1 high-minded, noble- minded, magnanimous; ततो युधिष्ठिरो राजा धर्मपुत्रो महामनाः Mb.4.1.7.
    -2 liberal.
    -3 proud, haughty. (-m) a fabulous animal called शरभ q. v.
    -मन्त्रः 1 any sacred text of the Vedas.
    -2 a great or efficacious charm, a powerful spell.
    -मन्त्रिन् m. the prime-minister, premier.
    -मयूरी N. of Buddhist goddess.
    -मलहारी a kind of Rāgiṇi.
    -महः a great festive procession; Sinhās.
    -महस् n. a great light (seen in the sky).
    -महोपाध्यायः 1 a very great preceptor.
    -2 a title given to learned men and reputed scholars; e. g. महामहो- पाध्यायमल्लिनाथसूरि &c.
    -मांसम् 'costly flesh', especially human flesh; न खलु महामांसविक्रयादन्यमुपायं पश्यामि Māl.4; अशस्त्रपूतं निर्व्याजं पुरुषाङ्गोपकल्पितम् । विक्रीयते महामांसं गृह्यतां गृह्यतामिदम् 5.12 (see Jagaddhara ad loc.).
    -माघी the full-moon day in the month of Māgha.
    -मात्र a.
    1 great in measure, very great or large.
    -2 most excellent, best; वृष्ण्यन्धकमहामात्रैः सह Mb.1.221.27; 5.22.37.
    (-त्रः) 1 a great officer of state, high state- official, a chief minister; (मन्त्रे कर्मणि भूषायां वित्ते माने परिच्छदे । मात्रा च महती येषां महामात्रास्तु ते स्मृताः); Ms. 9.259; गूढपुरुषप्रणिधिः कृतमहामात्रापसर्पः (v. l. महामात्यापसर्पः) पौरजानपदानपसर्पयेत् Kau. A.1.13.9; Rām.2.37.1.
    -2 an elephant-driver or keeper; मदोन्मत्तस्य भूपस्य कुञ्जरस्य च गच्छतः । उन्मार्गं वाच्यतां यान्ति महामात्राः समीपगाः ॥ Pt.1.161.
    -3 a superintendent of elephants.
    (-त्री) 1 the wife of a chief minister.
    -2 the wife of a spiritual teacher.
    -मानसी N. of a Jain goddess.
    -मान्य a. being in great honour with; मकरन्दतुन्दिलानामरविन्दानामयं महामान्यः Bv.1.6.
    -मायः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Viṣṇu.
    -माया 1 worldly illusion, which makes the material world appear really existent.
    -2 N. of Durgā; महामाया हरेश्चैषा यया संमोह्यते जगत् Devīmāhātmya.
    -मायूरम् a particular drug. (
    -री) N. of an amulet and a goddess; Buddh.
    -मारी 1 cholera, an epidemic.
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -मार्गः high road, main street. ˚पतिः a superintendent of roads.
    -मालः N. of Śiva.
    -माहेश्वरः a great worshipper of Maheśvara or Śiva.
    -मुखः a crocodile.
    -मुद्रा a parti- cular position of hands or feet (in practice of yoga).
    -मुनिः 1 a great sage.
    -2 N. of Vyāsa.
    -3 an epithet of Buddha.
    -4 of Agastya.
    -5 the coriander plant. (
    -नि n.)
    1 coriander seed.
    -2 any medicinal herb or drug.
    -मूर्तिः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -मूर्धन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -मूलम् a large radish. (
    -लः) a kind of onion.
    -मूल्य a. very costly. (
    -ल्यः) a ruby.
    -मृगः 1 any large animal.
    -2 an elephant,
    -3 the fabulous animal called शरभ.
    -मृत्युः, -मेधः N. of Śiva.
    -मृत्युंजयः a kind of drug.
    -मृधम् a great battle.
    -मेदः the coral tree; महामेदाभिधो ज्ञेयः Bhāva. P.
    -मेधा an epithet of Durgā.
    -मोहः great infatuation or confusion of mind. (ससर्ज) महामोहं च मोहं च तमश्चाज्ञानवृत्तयः Bhāg.3.12.2. (
    -हा) an epithet of Durgā.
    -यज्ञः 'a great sacrifice', a term applied to the five daily sacrifices or acts of piety to be performed by a house-holder; अध्यापनं ब्रह्मयज्ञः पितृयज्ञस्तु तर्पणम् । होमो दैवो (or देवयज्ञः) बलिर्भौतो (or भूतयज्ञः) नृयज्ञो$तिथिपूजनम् ॥ Ms.3.7,71, (for explanation, see the words s. v.).
    -2 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -यमकम् 'a great Yamaka', i. e. a stanza all the four lines of which have exactly the same words, though different in sense; e. g. see Ki.15.52, where विकाशमीयुर्जगतीशमार्गणाः has four different senses; cf. also बभौ मरुत्वान् विकृतः समुद्रः Bk.1.19.
    -यशस् a. very famous, renowned, celebrated.
    -यात्रा 'the great pilgrimage', the pilgrimage to Benares.
    -यानम् N. of the later system of Buddhist teaching, firstly promul- gated by Nāgārjuna (opp. हीनयान).
    -याम्यः an epi- thet of Viṣṇu.
    -युगम् 'a great Yuga', consisting of the four Yugas of mortals, or comprising 4,32, years of men.
    -योगिन् m.
    1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Viṣṇu.
    -3 a cock.
    -योनिः f. excessive dilation of the female organ.
    -रक्तम् coral.
    -रङ्गः a large stage.
    -रजतम् 1 gold; उच्चैर्महारजतराजिविराजितासौ Śi.4.28.
    -2 the thorn-apple.
    -रजनम् 1 safflower.
    -2 gold.
    -3 turmeric; तस्य हैतस्य पुरुषस्य रूपं यथा महारजनं वासः Bṛi. Up.2.3.6.
    -रत्नम् 1 a precious jewel; वज्रं मुक्ता प्रवालं च गोमेदश्चेन्द्रनीलकः ॥ वैडूर्यः पुष्करागश्च पाचिर्माणिक्यमेव च । महारत्नानि चैतानि नव प्रोक्तानि सूरिभिः ॥ Śukra.4.155-56.
    -रथः 1 a great chariot.
    -2 a great warrior or hero; द्रुपदश्च महारथः Bg.1.4; कुतः प्रभावो धनंजयस्य महारथजयद्रथस्य विपत्तिमुत्पादयितुम् Ve.2; दशरथः प्रशशास महारथः R.9.1; Śi.3.22; (a महारथ is thus defined:-- एको दशसहस्राणि योधयेद्यस्तु धन्विनाम् ॥ शस्त्रशास्त्र- प्रवीणश्च विज्ञेयः स महारथः ॥).
    -3 desire, longing; cf. मनोरथ.
    -रवः a frog.
    -रस a. very savoury.
    (-सः) 1 a sugar- cane.
    -2 quicksilver.
    -3 a precious mineral.
    -4 the fruit of the date tree.
    -5 any one of the eight substan- ces given below:-- दरदः पारदं शस्ये वैक्रान्तं कान्तमभ्रकम् । माक्षिकं विमलश्चेति स्युरेते$ष्टौ महारसाः ॥ (
    -सम्) sour ricewater.
    -राजः 1 a great king, sovereign or supreme ruler; पञ्चाशल्लक्षपर्यन्तो महाराजः प्रकीर्तितः Śukra.1.184.
    -2 a respect- ful mode of addressing kings or other great personages (my lord, your majesty, your highness); इति सत्यं महाराज बद्धो$स्म्यर्थेन कौरवैः Mb.
    -3 a deified Jaina teacher.
    -4 a fingernail. ˚अधिराजः a universal emperor, para- mount sovereign. ˚चूतः a kind of mango tree.
    -राजिकः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -राजिकाः (m. pl.) an epithet of a class of gods (said to be 22 or 236 in number.).
    -राज्यम् the rank or title of a reigning sovereign.
    -राज्ञी 1 the reigning or chief queen, principal wife of a king.
    -2 N. of Durgā.
    -रात्रम् midnight, dead of night.
    -रात्रिः, -त्री f.
    1 see महाप्रलय; ब्रह्मणश्च निपाते च महाकल्पो भवेन्नृप । प्रकीर्तिता महारात्रिः.
    -2 midnight.
    -3 the eighth night in the bright half of Āśvina.
    -राष्ट्रः 'the great kingdom', N. of a country in the west of India, the country of the Marāṭhās.
    -2 the people of Mahārāṣṭra; the Marāṭhās (pl.). (
    -ष्ट्री) N. of the principal Prākṛita; dialect, the language of the people of the Mahārāṣṭra; cf. Daṇḍin:-- महाराष्ट्राश्रयां भाषां प्रकृष्टं प्राकृतं विदुः Kāv.1.34.
    -रिष्टः a kind of Nimba tree growing on mountains.
    -रुज्, -ज a. very painful.
    -रुद्रः a form of Śiva.
    -रुरुः a species of antelope.
    -रूप a. mighty in form.
    (-पः) 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 resin.
    -रूपकम् a kind of drama.
    -रेतस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -रोगः a dangerous illness, grievous malady; (these are eight:-- उन्मादो राजयक्ष्मा च श्वासस्त्वग्दोष एव च । मधुमेहश्चाश्मरी च तथो- दरभगन्दरौ ॥).
    -रौद्र a. very dreadful. (
    -द्री) an epithet of Durgā.
    -रौरवः N. of one of the 21 hells; Ms.4.88-9.
    -लक्ष्मी 1 the great Lakṣmī, or Śakti of Nārāyaṇa; सेवे सैरिभमर्दिनीमिह महालक्ष्मीं सरोजस्थिताम्.
    -2 a young girl who represents the goddess Durgā at the Durgā festival.
    -लयः 1 a great world destruction.
    -2 the Supreme Being (महदादीनां लयो यस्मिन्).
    -लिङ्गम् the great Liṅga or Phallus. (
    -ङ्गः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -लोलः a crow.
    -लोहम् a magnet.
    -वंशः N. of a wellknown work in Pali (of the 5th century).
    -वक्षस् m. epithet of Śiva.
    -वनम् a large forest in Vṛindāvana.
    -वरा Dūrvā grass.
    -वराहः 'the great boar', an epithet of Viṣṇu in his third or boar incarnation.
    -वर्तनम् high wages;
    -वल्ली 1 the Mādhavī creeper.
    -2 a large creeping plant.
    -वसः the porpoise.
    -वसुः silver; Gīrvāṇa.
    -वाक्यम् 1 a long sentence.
    -2 any continuous composition or literary work.
    -3 a great proposition, principal sentence; such as तत्त्वमसि, ब्रह्मैवेदं सर्वम् &c.
    -4 a complete sentence (opp. अवान्तरवाक्य q. v.); न च महावाक्ये सति अवान्तरवाक्यं प्रमाणं भवति ŚB. on MS.6.4.25.
    -वातः a stormy wind, violent wind; महावाता<?>तैर्महिषकुलनीलैर्जलधरैः Mk.5.22.
    -वादिन् m. a great or powerful disputant.
    -वायुः 1 air (as an element).
    -2 stormy wind, hur- ricane, tempest.
    -वार्तिकम् N. of the Vārtikas of Kātyāyana on Pāṇini's Sūtras.
    -विडम् a kind of factitious salt.
    -विदेहा N. of a certain वृत्ति or condition of the mind in the Yoga system of philosophy.
    -विद्या the great lores; काली तारा महाविद्या षोडशी भुवनेश्वरी । भैरवी छिन्नमस्ता च विद्या धूमवती तथा । बगला सिद्धविद्या च मातङ्गी कमला- त्मिका । एता दश महाविद्याः... ॥
    -विपुला a kind of metre.
    -विभाषा a rule giving a general option or alternative; इति महाविभाषया साधुः.
    -विभूतिः an epithet of Śiva.
    -विषः a serpent having two mouths.
    -विषुवम् the vernal equinox. ˚संक्रान्तिः f. the vernal equinox (the sun's entering the sign Aries).
    -विस्तर a. very extensive or copious.
    -वीचिः N. of a hell.
    -वीरः 1 a great hero or warrior.
    -2 a lion.
    -3 the thunderbolt of Indra.
    -4 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -5 of Garuḍa.
    -6 of Hanumat.
    -7 a cuckoo.
    -8 a white horse.
    -9 a sacrificial fire.
    -1 a sacrificial vessel.
    -11 a kind of hawk. ˚चरितम् N. of a celebrated drama by Bhavabhūti.
    -वीर्य a. of great valour, very powerful.
    (-र्यः) 1 N. of Brah- man.
    -2 the Supreme Being. (
    -र्या) the wild cotton shrub.
    -2 an epithet of संज्ञा, the wife of the sun.
    -वृषः a great bull.
    -वेग a.
    1 very swift or fleet.
    (-गः) 1 great speed, excessive velocity.
    -2 an ape.
    -3 the bird Garuḍa.
    -वेघः a particular position of hands or feet (in the practice of Yoga).
    -वेल a. billowy.
    -व्याधिः f.
    1 a great disease.
    -2 a very bad kind of leprosy (black leprosy).
    -व्याहृतिः f. a great mystical word, i. e. भूर्, भुवस् and स्वर्.
    -व्रत a. very devotional, rigidly observing vows.
    (-तम्) 1 a great vow, a great reli- gious observance; a vow for not taking even water for a month; महाव्रतं चरेद्यस्तु Mb.12.35.22 (com. महाव्रतं मासमात्रं जलस्यापि त्यागः).
    -2 any great or funda- mental duty; प्राणैरपि हिता वृत्तिरद्रोहो व्याजवर्जनम् । आत्मनीव प्रियाधानमेतन्मैत्रीमहाव्रतम् Mv.5.59; क्रतौ महाव्रते पश्यन् ब्रह्मचारी- त्वरीरतम् N.17.23.
    -व्रतिन् m.
    1 a devotee, an ascetic.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -शक्तिः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Kārtikeya.
    -शङ्कुः the sine of the sun's eleva- tion.
    -शङ्खः 1 a great conch-shell; पौण्ड्रं दध्मौ महाशङ्खं Bg.1.15; महाशङ्खमयी माला ताराविद्याजपे प्रिया Tantra.
    -2 the temporal bone, forehead.
    -3 a human bone.
    -4 a particular high number.
    -5 one of Kubera's treasures.
    -शठः a kind of thorn-apple.
    -शब्द a. making a loud sound, very noisy, boisterous.
    -शल्कः a kind of sea- crab or prawn; Ms.3.272.
    -शालः a great householder.
    -शालिः a kind of large and sweetsmelling rice.
    -शाल्वणम् ('great fomentation') N. of a remedy; Suśr.
    -शासन a.
    1 exercising great power.
    -2 whose commands are great; त्रैलोक्यघिपतित्वमेव विरसं यस्मिन् महा- शासने Bh.3.8.
    (-नम्) 1 the knowledge of Brahma as expounded in the Upaniṣadas.
    -2 great order of government.
    -शिरस् m. a kind of serpent.
    -शिवरात्रिः N. of a festival on the 14th day of the dark half of Māgha,
    -शुक्तिः f. a pearl-shell.
    -शुक्ला an epithet of Sarasvatī.
    -शुभ्रम् silver.
    -शूद्रः (-द्री f.)
    1 a Sūdra in a high position.
    -2 a cowherd.
    -3 an upper servant. (
    -द्री) a female cow-keeper. (
    -द्रा) a Śudra woman in a high position.
    -शून्यम् a particular mental condi- tion of a Yogin.
    -शृङ्गः 1 a species of stag.
    -2 the शरभ animal.
    -श्मशानम् an epithet of Benares.
    -श्यामा the Sissoo tree. (Mar. शिसवी).
    -श्रमणः 1 an epithet of Buddha.
    -2 a Jain monk.
    -श्लक्ष्णा sand.
    -श्वासः a kind of asthma.
    -श्वेता 1 an epithet of Sarasvatī.
    -2 of Durgā.
    -3 white sugar.
    -संहिता great combi- nation.
    -संक्रान्तिः f. the winter solstice.
    -सती a very chaste woman.
    -सत्ता absolute existence.
    -सत्यः an epithet of Yama.
    -सत्त्व a.
    1 noble.
    -2 very strong or powerful.
    -3 just, righteous.
    (-त्त्वः) 1 a large animal.
    -2 N. of Sākyamuni.
    -3 an epithet of Kubera.
    -संधिविग्रहः the office of the minister of peace and war.
    -सन्नः an epithet of Kubera.
    -सन्निः m. (in music) a kind of measure.
    -समुद्रः the great ocean.
    -सर्गः a great or completely new creation (after a complete destruction of the world).
    -सर्जः the bread- fruit or jack-tree.
    -साधनभागः a great executive officer.
    -सांतपनः a kind of very rigid penance; see Ms.11. 218.
    -सांधिविग्रहिकः a minister of peace and war.
    -सामन्तः a great vassal.
    -सामान्यम् the widest genera- lity.
    -सारः a kind of Khadira tree.
    -सारथिः an epithet of Aruṇa.
    -साहसम् great violence or outrage, great audacity.
    -साहसिकः a dacoit, highwayman, a daring robber.
    -सिंहः the fabulous animal called Śarabha.
    -सिद्धिः f. a kind of magical power.
    -सुखम् 1 great pleasure.
    -2 copulation. (
    -खः) a Buddha.
    -सुगन्धम् a fragrant unguent.
    -सुगन्धिः a kind of antidote.
    -सुधा silver; Gīrvāṇa.
    -सुभिक्षम् good times.
    -सूक्तः the composer of the great Sūktas or hymns of the 1th Maṇḍala of the Ṛigveda.
    -सूक्ष्मा sand.
    -सूतः a mili- tary drum.
    -सेनः 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya; महासेन- प्रसूतिं तद्ययौ शरवणं महत् Rām.7.16.1.
    -2 the commander of a large army. (
    -ना) a great army.
    -स्कन्धः a camel.
    -स्थली the earth.
    -स्थानम् a great position.
    -स्नेहः a combination of the 4 kinds of fat.
    -स्मृतिः the Ṣaḍaṅgas and Smṛitis; महास्मृतिं पठेद्यस्तु तथैवानुस्मृतिं शुभाम् Mb.12.2.3.
    -स्रोतस् n. the bowels.
    -स्रग्विन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -स्वनः a kind of drum.
    -हंसः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -हविस् n. clarified butter.
    -हस्तः an epithet of Śiva.
    -हासः a loud or boisterous laughter, cachinnation.
    -हिमवत् m. N. of a mountain.
    -ह्रस्वा N. of a plant (Mar. कुहिली).

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > महा _mahā

  • 18 γινώσκω

    γινώσκω (in the form γιγνώσκω [s. below] since Homer; γιν. in Attic ins in Meisterhans3-Schw. index, from 325 B.C.; in pap fr. 277 B.C. [Mayser 165]; likew. LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.) impf. ἐγίνωσκον; fut. γνώσομαι; 2 aor. ἔγνων, impv. γνῶθι, γνώτω, subj. 1 sg. γνῶ and 3 sg. γνῶ (γνοῖ Mk 5:43; 9:30; Lk 19:15; Hm 4, 1, 5; B-D-F §95, 2; W-S. §13, 22; Mlt-H. 83; Rob. 1214); 2 sg. γνώσῃς (TestAbr A 8 p. 86, 5 [Stone p. 20]); opt. 1 sg. γνῴην; 3 sg. γνοίη Job 23:3, 5; inf. γνῶναι, ptc. γνούς; pf. ἔγνωκα, 3 pl. ἔγνωκαν J 17:7 (W-S. §13, 15 n. 15); plpf. ἐγνώκειν. Pass.: 1 fut. γνωσθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐγνώσθην; pf. ἔγνωσμαι. (On the spellings γινώσκειν and γιγνώσκειν s. W-S. §5, 31; B-D-F §34, 4; Mlt-H. 108.) This verb is variously nuanced in contexts relating to familiarity acquired through experience or association with pers. or thing.
    ① to arrive at a knowledge of someone or someth., know, know about, make acquaintance of
    ⓐ w. acc. of thing: mysteries (Wsd 2:22; En 104:12) Mt 13:11; Mk 4:11 v.l.; Lk 8:10; will of the Master (Just., D. 123, 4) 12:47f; that which brings peace 19:42; truth (Jos., Ant. 13, 291) J 8:32; times Ac 1:7; sin Ro 7:7; affection 2 Cor 2:4; spirit of truth J 14:17; way of righteousness 2 Pt 2:21 P72; God’s glory 1 Cl 61:1.—Abs. γνόντες (Is 26:11) when they had ascertained it Mk 6:38; ἐκ μέρους γ. know fragmentarily, only in part 1 Cor 13:9, 12.—W. prep. γ. τι ἔκ τινος (X., Cyr. 1, 6, 45; Jos., Vi. 364) know a thing by someth. (Diod S 17, 101, 6): a tree by its fruit Mt 12:33; Lk 6:44; 1J 4:6; γ. τι ἔν τινι (Sir 4:24; 26:9) 1J 4:2. Also γ. τι κατά τι (Gen 15:8): κατὰ τί γνώσομαι τοῦτο; by what (= how) shall I know this? Lk 1:18.
    ⓑ w. personal obj. (Plut., Mor. 69c ἄνδρα τοιοῦτον οὐκ ἔγνωμεν; Did., Gen. 45, 24 evil powers): God (Ael. Aristid. 52, 2 K.=28 p. 551 D.: γ. τὸν θεόν; Herm. Wr. 1, 3; 10, 19a; Sallust. 18, 3 p. 34, 9 θεούς; 1 Km 2:10; 3:7; 1 Ch 28:9; 3 Macc 7:6; PsSol 2:31; Da 11:32 Theod.; Philo, Ebr. 45; Ar. 15, 3; Just., D. 14, 12; Orig., C. Cels. 6, 66, 26f) J 14:7ab; 17:3, 25; Ro 1:21; Gal 4:9; 1J 2:3, 13; 3:1, 6; 4:6ff; 5:20 (for 1J s. M-EBoismard, RB 56, ’49, 365–91); PtK 2. Jesus Christ J 14:7; 17:3; 2 Cor 5:16 ( even though we have known Christ [irrealis, ‘contrary to fact’, is also prob.=even if we had known; cp. Gal 5:11], we now no longer know him; on this pass. s. κατά B7a; σάρξ 5); 1J 2:3f (Just., D. 28, 3). τινὰ ἔν τινι someone by someth. (Ps 47:4; Sir 11:28; TestNapht 3:4) Lk 24:35.
    ⓒ w. ὅτι foll. (BGU 824, 8; Philo, Det. Pot. Ins. 22) Mt 25:24; J 6:69; 7:26; 8:52; 14:20, 31; 17:7f, 25; 19:4. W. ὅθεν preceding by this one knows (EpJer 22) 1J 2:18. ἐν τούτῳ (Gen 42:33; Ex 7:17; Josh 3:10 al.) J 13:35; 1J 2:3, 5; 4:13; 5:2. W. combination of two constr. ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι μένει ἐν ἡμῖν, ἐκ τοῦ πνεύματος by this we know that (Jesus Christ) remains in us, namely by the spirit 3:24; cp. 4:13. W. an indir. question foll. (1 Km 14:38: 25:17; 2 Km 18:29; Ps 38:5) Mt 12:7; J 7:51. W. combination of two questions (double interrogative) ἵνα γνοῖ τίς τί διεπραγματεύσατο that he might know what each one had gained in his dealings Lk 19:15.
    ② to acquire information through some means, learn (of), ascertain, find out
    ⓐ w. acc. as obj. (1 Km 21:3; 1 Ch 21:2; 4 Macc 4:4) τοῦτο (1 Km 20:3) Mk 5:43. τὰ γενόμενα what has happened Lk 24:18. τὸ ἀσφαλές Ac 21:34; 22:30. τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν our situation Col 4:8; your faith 1 Th 3:5. Pass. become known to someone w. or without dat. of the pers. who is informed: of secret things Mt 10:26; Lk 8:17; 12:2. Of plots Ac 9:24 (cp. 1 Macc 6:3; 7:3, 30 al.).
    ⓑ w. ὅτι foll. (PGiss 11, 4 [118 A.D.] γεινώσκειν σε θέλω ὅτι; 1 Esdr 2:17; Ruth 3:14) J 4:1; 5:6; 12:9; Ac 24:11 v.l.
    ⓒ abs. (1 Km 14:29; 3 Km 1:11; Tob 8:12 al.) μηδεὶς γινωσκέτω nobody is to know of this Mt 9:30. ἵνα τις γνοῖ that anyone should obtain knowledge of it Mk 9:30.
    ⓓ γ. ἀπό τινος ascertain fr. someone 15:45.
    ③ to grasp the significance or meaning of someth., understand, comprehend
    ⓐ w. acc. foll. (Sir 1:6; 18:28; Wsd 5:7 v.l.; 9:13; Bar 3:9 al.; Just., A I, 63, 5; D. 68, 1 σκληροκάρδιοι πρὸς τὸ γνῶναι νοῦν … τοῦ θεοῦ): parables Mk 4:13; what was said Lk 18:34; (w. ἀναγινώσκειν in wordplay) Ac 8:30. ταῦτα J 3:10; 12:16; what one says J 8:43; God’s wisdom 1 Cor 2:8; the nature of God vs. 11; the nature of the divine spirit vs. 14; the love of Christ Eph 3:19 (s. γνῶσις 1); God’s ways Hb 3:10 (Ps 94:10); τὸν νόμον know the law J 7:49; Ro 7:1 (here perh.=have the law at one’s fingertips, cp. Menand., Sicyonius 138f, τῶν τοὺς νόμους εἰδότων; Just., D. 123, 2). πῶς οὖν [ταῦτα γιγν]ώ̣σκομεν; how then shall we know these things? Ox 1081, 25f (=SJCh 90, 1f), as read by Till p. 220 app.
    ⓑ abs. Mt 24:39.
    ⓒ w. ὅτι foll. (Wsd 10:12; EpJer 64; 1 Macc 6:13; 7:42; 2 Macc 7:28 al.) Mt 21:45; 24:32; Mk 12:12; 13:28f; Lk 21:30f; J 4:53; 8:27f; 2 Cor 13:6; Js 2:20.
    ⓓ w. indir. question foll. (Job 19:29) J 10:6; 13:12, 28.
    ④ to be aware of someth., perceive, notice, realize
    ⓐ w. acc.: their wickedness Mt 22:18; γ. δύναμιν ἐξεληλυθυῖαν that power had gone out Lk 8:46 (on the constr. w. the ptc. cp. PHamb 27, 13 [III B.C.]; BGU 1078 [I A.D.] γίνωσκε ἡγεμόνα εἰσεληλυθότα; POxy 1118, 7; Jos., Ant. 17, 342; Just., D. 39, 2 al.).
    ⓑ abs. (Ex 22:9; 1 Km 26:12) Mt 16:8; 26:10; Mk 7:24; 8:17.
    ⓒ w. ὅτι foll. (Gen 3:7; 8:11; 1 Macc 1:5 al.): ἔγνω τῷ σώματι ὅτι ἴαται she felt in her body that she was healed Mk 5:29; cp. 15:10; J 6:15; 16:19; Ac 23:6.
    ⑤ to have sexual intercourse with, have sex/marital relations with, euphemistic ext. of 1 (Menand., Fgm. 558, 5 Kock; Heraclid. Lembus, Pol. 64 [Aristot., Fgm. ed. VRose 1886, 383]; oft. in Plut. and other later authors, and LXX [Anz 306]) w. acc., said of a man as agent (Gen 4:1, 17; 1 Km 1:19; Jdth 16:22; ApcMos 4; Did., Gen. 143, 9) Mt 1:25 (in connection w. the topic of 1:25f see Plut., Mor. 717e; Olympiodorus, Vi. Plat. 1 [Westermann, 1850]: φάσμα Ἀπολλωνιακὸν συνεγένετο τῇ μητρὶ αὐτοῦ τῇ Περικτιόνῃ καὶ ἐν νυκτὶ φανὲν τῷ Ἀρίστωνι ἐκέλευσεν αὐτῷ μὴ μιγνύναι τῇ Περικτιόνῃ μέχρι τ. χρόνου τῆς ἀποτέξεως. Ὁ δʼ οὕτω πεποίηκεν: ‘an apparition of Apollo had relations with [Plato’s] mother Perictione, and in a nocturnal appearance to Ariston [Plato’s father] ordered him not to have intercourse w. P. until the time of her parturition. So he acted accordingly.’—The legend of Plato’s birth is traceable to Plato’s nephew Speusippus [Diog. L. 3:2; Jerome, Adv. Iovin. 1, 42]); of a woman (Judg 11:39; 21:12; Theodor. Prodr. 9, 486 H.) Lk 1:34 (DHaugg, D. erste bibl. Marienwort ’38; FGrant, JBL 59, ’40, 19f; HSahlin, D. Messias u. d. Gottesvolk, ’45, 117–20).
    ⑥ to have come to the knowledge of, have come to know, know (Nägeli 40 w. exx.)
    ⓐ w. acc.
    α. of thing (Bar 3:20, 23; Jdth 8:29; Bel 35; Just., D. 110, 1 καὶ τοῦτο γ.): τὴν ποσότητα 1 Cl 35:3; hearts (Ps 43:22) Lk 16:15; will Ro 2:18; truth (Just., D. 139, 5; Tat. 13, 1) 2J 1; 2 Cor 5:21; grace 8:9; πάντα (2 Km 14:20; Just., D. 127, 2) 1J 3:20. τὶ 1 Cor 8:2a. W. object clause preceding: ὸ̔ κατεργάζομαι οὐ γ. what I am accomplishing I really do not know Ro 7:15 (here γ. almost=desire, want, decide [Polyb. 5, 82, 1; Plut., Lycurg. 41[3, 9] ἔγνω φυγεῖν; Appian, Syr. 5 §18; Arrian, Anab. 2, 21, 8; 2, 25, 8; Paradox. Vat. 46 Keller ὅ τι ἂν γνῶσιν αἱ γυναῖκες; Jos., Ant. 1, 195; 14, 352; 16, 331]; mngs. 3 understand and 7 recognize are also prob.). W. attraction of the relative ἐν ὥρᾳ ᾗ οὐ γ. at an hour unknown to him Mt 24:50; Lk 12:46. W. acc. and ptc. (on the constr. s. 4a above) τὴν πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν that the city is guardian of the temple Ac 19:35.
    β. of pers. know someone (Tob 5:2; 7:4; Is 1:3) J 1:48; 2:24; 10:14f, 27; Ac 19:15; 2 Ti 2:19 (Num 16:5); Ox 1 recto, 14 (GTh 31). W. acc. and ptc. (s. α above, end and e.g. Just., A I, 19, 6) Hb 13:23.
    ⓑ w. acc. and inf. (Da 4:17; Just., D. 130, 2 al.) Hb 10:34.
    ⓒ w. ὅτι foll. (Sir 23:19; Bar 2:30; Tob 3:14) J 21:17; Ac 20:34; Phil 1:12; Js 1:3; 2 Pt 1:20; 3:3; γ. τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς ὅτι εἰσὶν μάταιοι he knows that the thoughts are vain 1 Cor 3:20 (Ps 93:11).—Oft. γινώσκετε, ὅτι you may be quite sure that Mt 24:33, 43; Mk 13:28f; Lk 10:11; 12:39; 21:31; J 15:18; 1J 2:29 (cp. UPZ 62, 32 [161 B.C.] γίνωσκε σαφῶς ὅτι πρός σε οὐ μὴ ἐπέλθω; 70, 14; 3 Macc 7:9; Judg 4:9; Job 36:5; Pr 24:12). In τοῦτο ἴστε γινώσκοντες, ὅτι Eph 5:5 the question is whether the two verbs are to be separated or not. In the latter case, one could point to Sym. Jer 49:22 ἴστε γινώσκοντες and 1 Km 20:3.
    ⓓ w. indir. question (Gen 21:26; 1 Km 22:3; Eccl 11:5; 2 Macc 14:32; Just., A I, 63, 3 τί πατὴρ καὶ τί υἱός) Lk 7:39; 10:22; J 2:25; 11:57.
    ⓔ w. adv. modifier γ. Ἑλληνιστί understand Greek Ac 21:37 (cp. X., Cyr. 7, 5; 31 ἐπίστασθαι Συριστί).
    ⓕ abs. (Gen 4:9; 18:21; 4 Km 2:3; Sir 32:8) Lk 2:43. τί ἐγὼ γινώσκω; how should I know? Hs 9, 9, 1.
    ⑦ to indicate that one does know, acknowledge, recognize as that which one is or claims to be τινά (Plut., Ages. 597 [3, 1]; Jos., Ant. 5, 112) οὐδέποτε ἔγνων ὑμᾶς I have never recognized you Mt 7:23; cp. J 1:10. ἐὰν γνωσθῇ πλέον τ. ἐπισκόπου if he receives more recognition than the supervisor (bishop) IPol 5:2. Of God as subject recognize someone as belonging to God, choose, almost= elect (Am 3:2; Hos 12:1; SibOr 5, 330) 1 Cor 8:3; Gal 4:9. In these pass. the γ. of God directed toward human beings is conceived of as the basis of and condition for their coming to know God; cp. the language of the Pythagoreans in HSchenkl, Wiener Studien 8, 1886 p. 265, no. 9 βούλει γνωσθῆναι θεοῖς• ἀγνοήθητι μάλιστα ἀνθρώποις; p. 277 no. 92 σοφὸς ἄνθρωπος κ. θεὸν σεβόμενος γινώσκεται ὑπὸ τ. θεοῦ; Porphyr., ad Marcellam 13 σοφὸς ἄνθρωπος γινώσκεται ὑπὸ θεοῦ; Herm. Wr. 1, 31 θεός, ὸ̔ς γνωσθῆναι βούλεται καὶ γινώσκεται τοῖς ἰδίοις; 10, 15 οὐ γὰρ ἀγνοεῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ὁ θεός, ἀλλὰ καὶ πάνυ γνωρίζει καὶ θέλει γνωρίζεσθαι. S. Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3 299f; Ltzm. on 1 Cor 8:3; RAC XI 446–659.—On the whole word: BSnell, D. Ausdrücke für die Begriffe des Wissens in d. vorplatonischen Philosophie 1924; EBaumann, ידע u. seine Derivate: ZAW 28, 1908, 22ff; 110ff; WBousset, Gnosis: Pauly-W. VII 1912, 1503ff; Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3 66–70; 284–308; PThomson, ‘Know’ in the NT: Exp. 9th ser. III, 1925, 379–82; AFridrichsen, Gnosis (Paul): ELehmann Festschr. 1927, 85–109; RPope, Faith and Knowledge in Pauline and Johannine Thought: ET 41, 1930, 421–27; RBultmann, TW I ’33, 688–715; HJonas, Gnosis u. spätantiker Geist I ’34; 2’55; EPrucker, Gnosis Theou ’37; JDupont, La Connaissance religieuse dans les Épîtres de Saint Paul, ’49; LBouyer, Gnosis: Le Sens orthodoxe de l’expression jusqu’aux pères Alexandrins: JTS n.s. 4, ’53, 188–203; WDavies, Knowledge in the Dead Sea Scrolls and Mt 11:25–30: HTR 46, ’53, 113–39; WSchmithals, D. Gnosis in Kor. ’55, 3’69; MMagnusson, Der Begriff ‘Verstehen’ (esp. in Paul), ’55; RCasey, Gnosis, Gnosticism and the NT: CDodd Festschr., ’56, 52–80; IdelaPotterie, οἶδα et γινώσκω (4th Gosp.), Biblica 40, ’59, 709–25; H-JSchoeps, Urgemeinde, Judenchristentum, Gnosis ’56; EKäsemann, Das Wandernde Gottesvolk (Hb)2, ’57; HJonas, The Gnostic Religion, ’58; JDupont, Gnosis, ’60; UWilckens, Weisheit u. Torheit ( 1 Cor 1 and 2) ’59; DGeorgi, Die Gegner des Pls im 2 Cor, ’64; DScholer, Nag Hammadi Bibliography, 1948–69, ’71.—B. 1209f. DELG s.v. γιγνώσκω. EDNT. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > γινώσκω

  • 19 πρός

    πρός prep. expressing direction ‘on the side of’, ‘in the direction of’: w. gen. ‘from’, dat. ‘at’, or acc. (the most freq. usage in our lit.) ‘to’ (s. the lit. s.v. ἀνά. beg.) (Hom.+).
    ① w. gen. (pseudepigr. only TestSol 10:4 C; apolog. exc. Ar.) marker of direction or aspect from which someth. is determined, to the advantage of, advantageous for (Thu. 3, 59, 1 οὐ πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας δόξης τάδε; Hdt. 1, 75; Dionys. Hal. 10, 30, 5; Diod S 18, 50, 5; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 20, 3; Mel., HE 4, 26, 8; Ath. 36, 1; B-D-F §240; Rob. 623f) οἱ πρ. ζωῆς μαζοί the life-giving breasts 1 Cl 20:10. πρ. τῆς σωτηρίας in the interest of safety Ac 27:34 (πρὸς τῆς ς. as Jos., Ant. 16, 313).
    ② w. dat. (pesudepigr. only TestSol 6:4 D; TestAbr [s. below]; JosAs 19:1.—Just.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 7; Ath., R. 22 p. 75, 10) marker of closeness of relation or proximity
    ⓐ of place near, at, by (Hom. et al. incl. Aristarch. Samos 398, 20; LXX; TestSol 6:4 D; Jos., Ant 8, 349; 381) Mk 5:11; around Rv 1:13. πρ. τῇ θύρᾳ ἑστηκέναι stand at the door (Menand., Fgm. 420, 1; 830 K.=352, 1; 644 Kö.; JosAs 19:1) J 18:16; cp. 20:11. πρὸς τῇ πύλῃ GJs 4:4; ἐγγίζοντος αὐτοῦ πρ. τῇ καταβάσει τοῦ ὄρους when he came close to the slope of the mountain Lk 19:37 (s. κατάβασις). πρ. τῇ κεφαλῇ, τοῖς ποσίν at the head, at the feet J 20:12. τὰ πρ. ταῖς ῥίζαις the parts near the roots Hs 9, 1, 6; 9, 21, 1. In geographical designations Μαγνησία ἡ πρ. Μαιάνδρῳ Magnesia on the Maeander IMagnMai ins.—(Cp. the temporal use: πρὸς ἑσπέρᾳ ἐστίν it takes place at evening TestAbr B 2 p. 106, 7 [Stone p. 60]; cp. Just., D. 105, 3 and 5; 142, 1.)
    ⓑ in addition to (Hom. et al.; Polyb., Just.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 7; Ath., R. 22 p. 75, 10; ins) πρὸς τούτοις (SIG 495, 105; 685, 70 and 100; 796 B, 30; 888, 35 al.; UPZ 26, 18; 25 [163 B.C.]; 2 Macc 4:9; 5:23; 9:17, 25; 14:4, esp. 12:2; Philo, Aet. M. 67 al.; Just., A I, 40, 5; D. 93, 4 al.) 1 Cl 17:1.
    ③ w. acc. (pseudepigr. and apolog. throughout) marker of movement or orientation toward someone/someth.
    ⓐ of place, pers., or thing toward, towards, to, after verbs
    α. of going; s. ἄγω 5, ἀναβαίνω 1aα, ἀνακάμπτω 1a, ἀπέρχομαι 1b, διαβαίνω, διαπεράω, εἴσειμι, εἰσέρχομαι 1bα, ἐκπορεύομαι 1c, also ἐπισυνάγομαι Mk 1:33, ἔρχομαι 1aβ, ἥκω 1d et al.—προσαγωγὴ πρὸς τὸν πατέρα Eph 2:18. εἴσοδος 1 Th 1:9a.
    β. of sending; s. ἀναπέμπω Lk 23:7, 15; Ac 25:21, ἀποστέλλω 1bα, πέμπω.
    γ. of motion gener.; s. βληθῆναι (βάλλω 1b), ἐπιστρέφω 1a, 4ab, κεῖμαι 2, πίπτω 1bαא and ב, προσκολλάω, προσκόπτω 1, προσπίπτω.
    δ. of leading, guiding; s. ἄγω 1a, ἀπάγω 2a and 4, also ἕλκω 2 end J 12:32, κατασύρω, etc.
    ε. of saying, speaking; s. ἀποκρίνομαι 1, also δημηγορέω Ac 12:21, εἶπον 1a, λαλέω 2aγ and 2b, λέγω 1bγ et al. Hebraistically λαλεῖν στόμα πρὸς στόμα speak face to face (Jer 39:4; ApcEsdr 6:6 p. 31, 10 Tdf.) 2J 12b; 3J 14 (cp. PGM 1, 39 τὸ στόμα πρὸς τὸ στόμα). πρὸς ἀλλήλους to one another, with each other, among themselves: s. ἀντιβάλλω, διαλαλέω, also διαλέγομαι Mk 9:34, διαλογίζομαι 8:16; Lk 20:14, εἶπον 24:32; J 16:17; 19:24, λαλέω, λέγω et al. πρὸς ἑαυτούς to themselves, to each other: s. διαλογίζομαι 1; εἶπον Mk 12:7; J 7:35; λέγω (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 15, 7 πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἔλεγεν; Just., D. 62, 2) Mk 10:26; 16:3. διαθήκην ὁ θεὸς διέθετο πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ God made a covenant with your fathers, when he said to Abraham Ac 3:25 (διατίθημι 1). ὅρκον ὀμνύναι πρ. τινα (ὀμνύω, end) Lk 1:73.
    ζ. of asking, praying δέομαι Ac 8:24. εὔχομαι (s. εὔχομαι 1; cp. 2 Macc 9:13) 2 Cor 13:7. προσεύχομαι (cp. 1 Km 12:19; 2 Esdr 12: 4; 2 Macc 2:10) Hv 1, 1, 9. γνωρίζεσθαι πρὸς τὸν θεόν Phil 4:6 (γνωρίζω 1).—Also after nouns like δέησις, λόγος et al. Ro 10:1; 15:30; 2 Cor 1:18 al.
    ⓑ of time near, at, or during (a certain time)
    α. denoting approach toward (X., Pla. et al.) πρὸς ἑσπέραν toward evening Lk 24:29 (so Just., D. 97, 1; s. ἑσπέρα).
    β. of temporal duration for πρὸς καιρόν for a time, for a while (καιρός 1a) Lk 8:13; 1 Cor 7:5. πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας (καιρός 1a) 1 Th 2:17. πρὸς ὥραν for an hour, i.e. for a short time J 5:35; 2 Cor 7:8; Gal 2:5a; Phlm 15; MPol 11:2. πρὸς ὀλίγας ἡμέρας Hb 12:10. Also πρὸς ὀλίγον Js 4:14; GJs 19:2 (ὀλίγος 3). πρὸς τὸ παρόν for the present Hb 12:11 (πάρειμι 1b).
    α. with conscious purpose for, for the purpose of, on behalf of οὗτος ἦν ὁ πρὸς τὴν ἐλεημοσύνην καθήμενος this was the one who sat (and begged) for alms Ac 3:10. πρὸς τὴν ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ Ro 3:26. τοῦτο πρὸς τὸ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν σύμφορον λέγω 1 Cor 7:35a; cp. 35b. ἐγράφη πρὸς νουθεσίαν ἡμῶν 10:11. Cp. Ro 15:2; 1 Cor 6:5; 2 Cor 4:6; 7:3; 11:8; Eph 4:12.—W. acc. of the inf. (Polyb. 1, 48, 5; PRyl 69, 16; BGU 226, 22; Jer 34:10; 2 Macc 4:45; TestJob 45:4; Jos., Ant. 14, 170; 15, 148 al.; Just., D. 132, 1) πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις in order to be seen by men Mt 23:5; cp. 6:1. πρὸς τὸ κατακαῦσαι αὐτά 13:30. πρὸς τὸ ἐνταφιάσαι με 26:12. πρὸς τὸ ἀποπλανᾶν εἰ δυνατὸν τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς Mk 13:22. πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀτενίσαι υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 2 Cor 3:13. Cp. Eph 6:11a; 1 Th 2:9; 2 Th 3:8; Js 3:3 v.l.
    β. gener. of design, destiny (Demetr.[?]: 722 Fgm. 7 Jac. πρὸς τὴν κάρπωσιν; TestJob 42:7 τὰ πρὸς θυσίαν; Jos., Bell. 4, 573 τὸ πρ. σωτηρίαν φάρμακον) τῷ θεῷ πρὸς δόξαν for the glory of God 2 Cor 1:20 (on πρὸς δόξαν cp. SIG 456, 15; 704e, 21; 3 Macc 2:9; Just., A I, 15, 10 μηδὲν πρὸς δόξαν ποιεῖν). τῇ πυρώσει πρὸς πειρασμὸν ὑμῖν γινομένῃ 1 Pt 4:12.—After adjectives and participles for ἀγαθὸς πρὸς οἰκοδομήν Eph 4:29 (ἀγ. 1a) ἀδόκιμος Tit 1:16. ἀνεύθετος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν Ac 27:12. γεγυμνασμένος Hb 5:14. δυνατός 2 Cor 10:4. ἐξηρτισμένος 2 Ti 3:17. ἕτοιμος (q.v. b) Tit 3:1; 1 Pt 3:15. ἱκανός (q.v. 2) 2 Cor 2:16. ὠφέλιμος 1 Ti 4:8ab; 2 Ti 3:16.
    γ. of the result that follows a set of circumstances (so that) πάντα πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν γινέσθω everything is to be done in such a way that it contributes to edification 1 Cor 14:26; cp. vs. 12; Col 2:23 (but see eδ below); 1 Ti 4:7. ὁ βλέπων γυναῖκα πρὸς τὸ ἐπιθυμῆσαι αὐτήν one who looks at a woman with sinful desire Mt 5:28, but s. eε below. λευκαί εἰσιν πρὸς θερισμόν they (the fields) are white, so that the harvest may begin J 4:35. αὕτη ἡ ἀσθένεια οὐκ ἔστιν πρὸς θάνατον this disease is not of the kind that will lead to death 11:4. Cp. ἁμαρτία πρὸς θάνατον 1J 5:16f.
    ⓓ of relationship (hostile or friendly), against, for
    α. hostile against, with after verbs of disputing, etc.; s. ἀνταγωνίζομαι, γογγύζω, διακρίνομαι (διακρίνω 5b), διαλέγομαι 1, πικραίνομαι (πικραίνω 2), στασιάζω, ἔστην (ἵστημι B3). ἐστίν τινι ἡ πάλη πρός Eph 6:12. ἔχειν τι πρός τινα have anything (to bring up) against someone Ac 24:19. μομφὴν ἔχειν πρός τινα Col 3:13. πρᾶγμα ἔχειν πρός τινα 1 Cor 6:1 (πρᾶγμα 4). ἐγένετο γογγυσμὸς τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν πρὸς τοὺς Ἑβραίους Ac 6:1. τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 2 Cor 6:11 (ἀνοίγω 7). ἐν ἔχθρᾳ ὄντες πρὸς αὐτούς Lk 23:12. βλασφημίαι πρὸς τὸν θεόν Rv 13:6 (cp. TestJob 25:10 εἰπὲ ἓν ῥῆμα πρὸς τὸν θεόν). ἀσύμφωνοι πρ. ἀλλήλους unable to agree among themselves Ac 28:25 (Tat. 25, 2); cp. the structure of Col 2:23.
    β. friendly to, toward, with, before ἐργάζεσθαι τὸ ἀγαθόν Gal 6:10ab (ἐργάζομαι 2a). μακροθυμεῖν 1 Th 5:14. εἰρήνην ἔχειν πρὸ τὸν θεόν Ro 5:1 (s. εἰρήνη 2b). παρρησίαν ἔχειν πρὸς τ. θεόν 1J 3:21; cp. 5:14. πίστιν ἔχειν πρὸς τ. κύριον Ἰ. Phlm 5. πεποίθησιν ἔχειν πρὸς τ. θεόν 2 Cor 3:4. ἔχειν χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν Ac 2:47 (FCheetham, ET 74, ’63, 214f). πραΰτητα ἐνδείκνυσθαι Tit 3:2. ἐν σοφίᾳ περιπατεῖν Col 4:5. ἤπιον εἶναι πρὸς πάντας 2 Ti 2:24.—After substantives: πίστις 1 Th 1:8 (cp. 4 Macc 15:24; Just., D. 121, 2); παρρησία 2 Cor 7:4; κοινωνία 6:14; συμφώνησις vs. 15 (cp. Is 7:2).
    ⓔ to indicate a connection by marking a point of reference, with reference/regard to
    α. with reference to (Ocellus Luc. c. 42 πρὸς ἡμᾶς=with reference to us) ἔγνωσαν ὅτι πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν παραβολὴν εἶπεν they recognized that he had spoken the parable with reference to them Mk 12:12; Lk 20:19; cp. 12:41 (Vita Aesopi cod. G 98 P. οἱ Σάμιοι νοήσαντες πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς εἰρῆσθαι τοὺς λόγους; Just., D. 122, 3 ταῦτα … πρὸς τὸν χριστὸν … εἴρηται). ἔλεγεν παραβολὴν πρὸς τὸ δεῖν προσεύχεσθαι he told them a parable about the need of praying 18:1 (Just., D. 90, 5 σύμβολον … πρὸς τὸν χριστόν). οὐδεὶς ἔγνω πρὸς τί εἶπεν αὐτῷ nobody understood with respect to what (= why) he said (this) to him J 13:28. πρὸς τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν with reference to (i.e. because of) your perversity Mt 19:8; Mk 10:5 (Just., D. 45, 3). Cp. Ro 10:21a; Hb 1:7f. οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ πρὸς οὐδὲ ἓν ῥῆμα he did not answer him a single word with reference to anything Mt 27:14 (s. ἀποκρίνομαι 1). ἀνταποκριθῆναι πρὸς ταῦτα Lk 14:6 (s. ἀνταποκρίνομαι). ἀπρόσκοπον συνείδησιν ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν θεόν have a clear conscience with respect to God Ac 24:16.
    β. as far as … is concerned, with regard to (Maximus Tyr. 31, 3b) πρὸς τὴν πληροφορίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος Hb 6:11. συνιστάνοντες ἑαυτοὺς πρὸς πᾶσαν συνείδησιν ἀνθρώπων we are recommending ourselves as far as every human conscience is concerned = to every human conscience (πρός w. acc. also stands simply for the dative; s. Mayser II/2 p. 359) 2 Cor 4:2. τὰ πρὸς τὸν θεόν that which concerns God or as adverbial acc. with reference to what concerns God (Soph., Phil. 1441; X., De Rep. Lac. 13, 11; Ps.-Isocr. 1, 13 εὐσεβεῖν τὰ πρὸς τ. θεούς; SIG 204, 51f; 306, 38; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 109, 3 εὐσεβὴς τὰ πρὸς θεούς; Ex 4:16; 18:19; Jos., Ant. 9, 236) Ro 15:17; Hb 2:17; 5:1. τὰ πρός τι that which belongs to someth.; that which is necessary for someth. (Plut., Mor. 109b; Jos., Ant. 12, 405 τὰ πρὸς τὴν μάχην; 14, 27; a standard term in state documents) τὰ πρὸς ἀπαρτισμόν Lk 14:28 v.l. τὰ πρὸς εἰρήνην (TestJud 9) vs. 32; what makes for peace 19:42. Cp. Ac 28:10; 2 Pt 1:3.
    γ. elliptically τί πρὸς ἡμᾶς (sc. ἐστιν); what is that to us? Mt 27:4. τί πρὸς σέ; how does it concern you? J 21:22f (cp. Epict. 4, 1, 10 τί τοῦτο πρὸς σέ; Plut., Mor. 986b; Vi. Aesopi I 14 p. 265, 4 Eberh. τί πρὸς ἐμέ; ApcMos 11 οὐ πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἡ πλεονεξία σου).
    δ. in accordance with ὀρθοποδεῖν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν Gal 2:14. πρὸς τὸ κένωμα in accordance with the emptiness Hm 11:3. πρὸς τὸ θέλημα in accordance w. the will Lk 12:47; Hs 9, 5, 2. πρὸς ἃ ἔπραξεν 2 Cor 5:10. πρὸς ὅ Eph 3:4.—In comparison with, to be compared to (Pind., Hdt. et al.; Ps.-Luc., Halc. 3 πρὸς τὸν πάντα αἰῶνα=[life is short] in comparison to all eternity; Sir 25:19; TestJob 18:8; 23:8; Just., D. 19, 2 οὐδὲν … πρὸς τὸ βάπτισμα τοῦτο τὸ τῆς ζωῆς ἐστι; Tat. 29, 1 ὀρθοποδεῖν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν) ἄξια πρός Ro 8:18 (RLeaney, ET 64, ’52f; 92 interprets Col 2:23 in the light of this usage). Cp. IMg 12.
    ε. expressing purpose πρὸς τό w. inf. (s. Mayser II/1 p. 331f) in order to, for the purpose of Mk 13:22; Ac 3:19 v.l. Perh. Mt 5:28 (s. cγ above).
    ⓕ in adverbial expressions (cp. πρὸς ὀργήν = ὀργίλως Soph., Elect. 369; Jos., Bell. 2, 534. πρὸς βίαν = βιαίως Aeschyl., Prom. 208, 353, Eum. 5; Menand., Sam. 559 S. [214 Kö.]; Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 3. πρὸς ἡδονήν Jos., Ant. 7, 195; 12, 398; Just., A II, 3, 2 πρὸς χάριν καὶ ἡδονὴν τῶν πολλῶν) πρὸς φθόνον prob.=φθονερῶς jealously Js 4:5 (s. φθόνος, where the lit. is given). πρὸς εὐφρασίαν w. joy AcPl Ox 6, 9f (cp. Aa 1 p. 241, 1 ὑπερευφραινομένη).
    ⓖ by, at, near πρός τινα εἶναι be (in company) with someone Mt 13:56; Mk 6:3; 9:19a; 14:49; Lk 9:41; J 1:1f; 1 Th 3:4; 2 Th 2:5; 3:10; 1J 1:2. διαμένειν Ac 10:48 D; Gal 2:5b. ἐπιμένειν 1:18; 1 Cor 16:7. παραμένειν 16:6 (v.l. κατα-). μένειν Ac 18:3 D. παρεῖναι 12:20; 2 Cor 11:9; Gal 4:18, 20; cp. παρουσία πρὸς ὑμᾶς Phil 1:26. παρεπιδημεῖν 1 Cl 1:2. ἐποίησεν τρεῖς μῆνας πρὸς τὴν Ἐλισάβεδ GJs 12:3. πρὸς σὲ ποιῶ τὸ πάσχα Mt 26:18b. Cp. also 2 Cor 1:12; 7:12; 12:21; 2 Th 3:1; Phlm 13; 1J 2:1; Hm 11:9b v.l.—πρὸς ἑαυτούς among or to themselves Mk 9:10 (in case πρὸς ἑ. belongs w. τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν; B-D-F §239, 1). πρὸς ἑαυτὸν προσηύχετο he uttered a prayer to himself Lk 18:11. Cp. 24:12.—δεδεμένον πρὸς θύραν tied at a door Mk 11:4. τὴν πᾶσαν σάρκα ἀνθρώπων πρὸς ἡδονὴν ἐδέσμευεν (Satan) bound all humankind to self-gratification AcPlCor 2:11. πρὸς τ. θάλασσαν by the seaside Mk 4:1b. On πρὸς τὸ φῶς at the fire Mk 14:54; Lk 22:56 s. B-D-F §239, 3; Rob. 625 (perh. w. the idea of turning toward the fire; s. also 4 Km 23:3). πρὸς ἓν τῶν ὀρέων at one of the mountains 1 Cl 10:7. τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν the place near the door Mk 2:2. πρὸς γράμμα letter by letter Hv 2, 1, 4.—On πρός τι terms s. PWouters, The Treatment of Relational Nouns in Ancient Grammar: Orbis 38, ’95, 149–78 (lit.). M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πρός

  • 20 coprire

    1. [ko'prire]
    vb irreg vt
    (gen) to cover, (occupare: carica, posto) to hold, (persona: proteggere: anche), fig to cover, shield, (fig : suono) to drown, (segreto, sentimenti) to conceal

    coprire di o con — (gen) to cover with

    coprire qn di insulti/di doni — to shower insults/gifts on sb

    coprire un rischio Econ, Assicurazione — to cover a risk

    (persona) to wrap (o.s.) up, Assicurazione

    coprirsi contro — to insure o.s. against

    coprirsi di gloria/di ridicolo — to cover o.s. with glory/with ridicule

    3. vip (coprirsi)
    (cielo) to cloud over

    (rivestirsi) coprirsi di — (muffa, macchie) to be covered in

    Nuovo dizionario Italiano-Inglese > coprire

Страницы
  • 1
  • 2

См. также в других словарях:

  • hour — [[t]aʊər, ˈaʊ ər[/t]] n. 1) hor a period of time equal to 1/24 of a mean solar or civil day and equivalent to 60 minutes 2) hor any specific one of these 24 periods, usu. reckoned in two series of 12, one series from midnight to noon and the… …   From formal English to slang

  • hour — hourless, adj. /oweur, ow euhr/, n. 1. a period of time equal to one twenty fourth of a mean solar or civil day and equivalent to 60 minutes: He slept for an hour. 2. any specific one of these 24 periods, usually reckoned in two series of 12, one …   Universalium

  • hour — W1S1 [auə US aur] n ▬▬▬▬▬▬▬ 1¦(60 minutes)¦ 2¦(business/work etc)¦ 3 (work) long/regular etc hours 4¦(time of day)¦ 5¦(long time)¦ 6¦(o clock)¦ 7 1300/1530/1805 etc hours 8 by the hour/from hour to hour 9 lunch/din …   Dictionary of contemporary English

  • One O'Clock Lab Band — Poster: 2009 Performance in New York Background information Genres Jazz, Big band …   Wikipedia

  • One Tree Hill College — Location Physical: 421–451 Great South Road, Penrose, Auckland 1061, New Zealand Postal: PO Box 17471, Greenlane, Auckland 1546, New Zealand …   Wikipedia

  • hour — noun (C) 1 60 MINUTES a period of 60 minutes. There are 24 hours in a day: The flight to Moscow takes just over three hours. | Karen is paid $10 an hour. | in an hour/in an hour s time (=an hour from now): I ll be back in an hour. | an hour s… …   Longman dictionary of contemporary English

  • Rover's Morning Glory — Infobox Radio Show show name = Rover s Morning Glory!!!!!! imagesize = 250px caption = The Show s Official Logo format = Talk, Comedy runtime = 5 hours per episode, Monday through Friday creator = Rover (Shane French) writer = executive producer …   Wikipedia

  • Paths of Glory — Infobox Film name = Paths of Glory caption = Theatrical poster director = Stanley Kubrick producer = James B. Harris writer = Stanley Kubrick Jim Thompson Calder Willingham Story: Humphrey Cobb starring = Kirk Douglas, Ralph Meeker Adolphe Menjou …   Wikipedia

  • Morning Glory cloud — A Morning Glory cloud formation between Burketown and Normanton, Australia …   Wikipedia

  • Morning glory — This article is about the plant. For other uses of this name see Morning glory (disambiguation). Morning glory flower, Ipomoea nil …   Wikipedia

  • TNA Bound for Glory — Bound for Glory is a professional wrestling pay per view (PPV) event, produced every October by the American professional wrestling promotion, Total Nonstop Action (TNA). The event was created in 2005 to be their premier event of the year,… …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»